EPA-450/5-87-003
  NATIONAL AIR TOXICS
  INFORMATION CLEARINGHOUSE
  oEFA
Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards
Research Triangle Park, North Carolina 27711
                State and Territorial Air Pollution Program Administrators
                Association of Local Air Pollution Control Officials
   Qualitative and Quantitative
         Carcinogenic Risk
            Assessment
               June 1987

-------
DCN No. 87-239-001-13-12
EPA Contract No. 68-02-4330
Work Assignment No. 13
EPA 450/5-87-003
               NATIONAL AIR TOXICS INFORMATION CLEARINGHOUSE:
          QUALITATIVE AND QUANTITATIVE CARCINOGENIC RISK ASSESSMENT
                                FINAL REPORT
                                Prepared for:

                               Beth M. Hassett
                           Work Assignment Manager
                    Strategies and Air Standards Division
                Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards
                    U. S. Environmental Protection Agency
                Research Triangle Park, North Carolina   27711

                           Technical Consultants:
Dr. Ila Cote, Toxicologist
Strategies and Air Standards
 Division
Office of Air Quality Planning
 and Standards
U. S. Environmental Protection
 Agency
Research Triangle Park, NC  27711
Dr. Steven Bayard, Statistician
Mr. Charles Ris, Deputy Director
Carcinogen Assessment Group
Office of Health and
 Environmental Assessment
U. S. Environmental Protection
 Agency
Washington, D.C.  20460
                                Prepared by:
                             Radian Corporation
                 3200 East Chapel Hill Road/Progress Center
                            Post Office Box 13000
                Research Triangle Park, North Carolina   27709
                                  June 1987
                                                  'T.F.  Environmental Protection /Lgs
                                                  }"••., ion  5, Library (5PL-16)
                                                  f'60 S.  Dearborn Street,  Hoom 1670
                                                  Liiuaso, *IL   60G04

-------
                                 DISCLAIMER

     This report has been reviewed by the Office of Air Quality Planning and
Standards, U. S. Environmental Protection Agency, and approved for
publication as received from Radian Corporation.  Approval does not signify
that the contents reflect the views and policies of the U. S. Environmental
Protection Agency, nor does mention of trade names or commercial products
constitute endorsement or recommendation for use.

-------
                                   PREFACE

     The EPA is supporting State and local agency air toxics control  efforts
by implementation of an information dissemination center,  known as the
National Air Toxics Information Clearinghouse.   The EPA established the
Clearinghouse in response to requests for assistance from State and local
agencies concerned about control of toxic air emissions.  The Clearinghouse
is composed of a computerized data base which contains indexed information
on toxic and potentially toxic air pollutants,  hard copy reports of
information from the data base, several special reports such as this one,
and a quarterly newsletter.  The Clearinghouse has been designed and is
being implemented in close coordination with the State and Territorial Air
Pollution Program Administrators (STAPPA) and the Association of Local Air
Pollution Control Officials (ALAPCO).
     The purpose of this report is to describe the basic principles and
assumptions associated with a qualitative and quantitative carcinogenic risk
assessment and to illustrate these features using several  examples of
quantitative risk assessments done by State and local agencies.  The report
is intended to help readers better understand and interpret a risk
assessment rather than to provide instructions that would enable them to
conduct a risk assessment.  The report is aimed at managers and staff
members in State and local agencies who are concerned with the use of
qualitative and quantitative carcinogenic risk assessment for evaluating
emissions of toxic air pollutants.
     Other Clearinghouse publications include:

     t    National Air Toxics Information Clearinghouse:  Rationale for Air
          Toxics Control in Seven State and Local Agencies, EPA 450/5-86-005,
          NTIS: PB86 181179/AS, August 1985;
     •    National Air Toxics Information Clearinghouse:  NATICH Data Base
          Users Guide for Data Viewing, EPA 450/5-85-008,
          NTIS: PB86 123601/AS, September 1985;

-------
National Air Toxics Information Clearinghouse:   Ongoing Research
and Regulatory Development Projects,  EPA 450/5-86-007,
NTIS: PB86 226396/AS,  June 1986;
National Air Toxics Information Clearinghouse:   Bibliography of
Selected Reports and Federal  Register Notices Related to Air
Toxics, EPA 450/5-86-008; NTIS: PB87  125787/AS, July 1986;
National Air Toxics Information Clearinghouse:   How the
Clearinghouse Can Help to Answer Your Air Toxics Questions,
EPA 450/5-86-009; NTIS: PB pending; July 1986;
National Air Toxics Information Clearinghouse:   Methods for
Pollutant Selection and Prioritization, EPA 450/5-86-010;
NTIS: PB87 124079/AS,  July 1986;
National Air Toxics Information Clearinghouse:   NATICH Report on
State and Local Air Toxics Activities, 2 Volumes,
EPA 450/5-86-011A, B;  NTIS: PB87 125779/AS, July 1986;
National Air Toxics Information Clearinghouse Database User's
Guide for Data Entry and Editing; EPA 450/5-87-002;
NTIS: PB87 175576/AS;  February 1987;  and
National Air Toxics Information Clearinghouse Newsletters,
December 1983, February 1984, April 1984, July 1984,
September 1984, December 1984, February 1985, May 1985,
August 1985, December 1985, March 1986, June 1986, September 1986,
December 1986, March 1987, and June 1987.

-------
                                  ABSTRACT

     The National Air Toxics Information Clearinghouse has been established
by the EPA Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards (OAQPS) in
coordination with the State and Territorial Air Pollution Program
Administrators (STAPPA) and the Association of Local Air Pollution Control
Officials (ALAPCO) for the purpose of aiding information transfer among
Federal, State, and local air quality management agencies.  This report has
been published as part of that effort.  The purpose of this report is to
describe the basic principles and assumptions associated with a qualitative
and quantitative carcinogenic risk assessment to help State and local
agencies better understand and interpret a risk assessment.  The report
discusses the four steps of risk assessment:  hazard identification,
dose-response assessment, exposure assessment, and risk characterization,
focusing primarily on the dose-response assessment.  In addition to
describing the basic principles of carcinogenic risk assessment, the report
describes examples of risk assessment work done by EPA and four State/local
agencies.
                                     Vll

-------
                              TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section                                                               Page
  1.0     Introduction 	  1-1
          1.1  Purpose 	  1-1
          1.2  Organization 	  1-1
          1.3  Definition of Quantitative Carcinogenic Risk
               Assessment 	  1-2
  2.0     Hazard Identification 	  2-1
          2.1  Physical and Chemical Properties 	  2-1
          2.2  Structure/Activity Relationships 	  2-3
          2.3  Pharmacokinetic Interactions 	  2-3
               2.3.1  Absorption 	  2-4
               2.3.2  Distribution  	  2-4
               2.3.3  Metabolism 	  2-5
               2.3.4  Excretion 	  2-6
          2.4  Routes of Exposure 	  2-6
          2.5  Toxicologic Effects  	  2-7
               2.5.1  Short-Term Predictive Tests 	  2-7
               2.5.2  Long-Term Animal Bioassays for Cancer 	  2-9
          2.6  Epidemiologic Data 	  2-14
          2.7  Weight of Evidence of Carcinogenicity for Animal
               and Human Studies 	  2-17
  3.0     Dose-Response Assessment  	  3-1
          3.1  The Process of Carcinogenesis 	  3-4
          3.2  The Concept of Thresholds 	  3-8

-------
Section                                                               Page
          3.3  Selection of Data From Which to Derive the
               Dose-Response Assessment 	   3-9
               3.3.1  Epidemiologic Studies 	   3-9
               3.3.2  Animal Studies 	   3-11
          3.4  Dose-Response Assessment Techniques 	   3-13
               3.4.1  Low Dose Extrapolation Issues 	   3-13
               3.4.2  Mathematical  Extrapolation Models for
                      Animal Studies 	   3-14
               3.4.3  Dose Conversions 	   3-21
               3.4.4  Modeling of Animal Studies Using the
                      Linearized Multistage Model 	   3-24
               3.4.5  Modeling of Epidemiologic Studies 	   3-27
  4.0     Exposure Assessment 	   4-1
  5.0     Risk Characterization 	   5-1
          5.1  Presentation of Numerical Estimates of Risk 	   5-1
          5.2  Presentation of the Uncertainties in Risk
               Assessment 	   5-3
          5.3  Presentation of the Assumptions Used in Risk
               Assessment 	   5-5
  6.0     Risk Management 	   6-1
  7.0     Resource Requirements 	   7-1
  8.0     Northeast States for Coordinated Air Use Management -
          Ri sk Assessment for Tetrachloroethylene  	   8-1
          8.1  Objectives in Undertaking Risk Assessment  	   8-1
          8.2  Overview of Methodology Used 	   8-1
               8.2.1  Hazard Identification 	   8-2
               8.2.2  Dose-Response Assessment  	  8-3
               8.2.3  Exposure Assessment and Risk
                      Characterization  	  8-6

-------
Section
          8.3  Resource Requirements 	   8-6
          8.4  Other Risk Assessment Work 	   8-7
          8.5  NESCAUM's Advice to Other Agencies 	   8-7
  9.0     California Department of Health Services 	   9-1
          9.1  Objectives in Undertaking Risk Assessment 	   9-1
          9.2  Overview of Methodology Used 	   9-1
               9.2.1  Hazard Identification 	   9-2
               9.2.2  Dose-Response Assessment 	   9-4
               9.2.3  Exposure Assessment 	   9-10
               9.2.4  CAPCOA Source Assessment Manual 	   9-11
          9.3  Risk Management 	   9-13
          9.4  Resources 	   9-14
          9.5  Other Risk Assessment Work 	   9-14
          9.6  Air Toxics Status 	   9-14
 10.0     Michigan Department of Natural Resources 	   10-1
          10.1 Objectives in Undertaking Risk Assessment 	   10-1
          10.2 General Overview of Methodology Used 	   10-1
               10.2.1  Hazard Identification 	   10-1
               10.2.2  Dose-Response Assessment 	   10-3
               10.2.3  Exposure Assessment 	   10-4
               10.2.4  Risk Characterization 	   10-7
          10.3 Risk Management 	   10-9
          10.4 Resource Requirements 	   10-10
          10.5 Other Risk Assessment Work 	   10-10
          10.6 Advice to Other Agencies 	   10-10

-------
Section                                                               Page
 11.0     Clark County Health District 	   11-1
          11.1 Objectives in Undertaking Risk Assessment 	   11-1
          11.2 General Overview of Methodology Used 	   11-1
               11.2.1  Hazard Identification 	   11-1
               11.2.2  Dose-Response Assessment 	   11-2
               11.2.3  Exposure Assessment 	   11-2
               11.2.4  Risk Characterization	   11-3
          11.3 Ongoing Activities 	   11-4
          11.4 Resource Requirements 	   11-6
          11.5 Advice to Other Agencies 	   11-6
          Glossary 	   G-l
          References  	   R-l
          Appendix A  - EPA Guidelines for Carcinogen Risk
          Assessment  	   A-l
          Appendix B  - International Agency for Research on
          Cancer Weight-of-Evidence Classification Scheme 	   B-l
          Appendix C  - Cancer Information Sources  	   C-l
                                     XII

-------
                               LIST OF TABLES
Table                                                                 Page
 2-1      General Classification of Tests Available to Determine
          Properties Related to Carcinogenicity 	  2-2
 2-2      Illustrative Categorization of Evidence Based on
          Animal and Human Data 	  2-22
 3-1      Estimates of Low-Dose Risk to Humans Based on Salivary
          Gland Region Sarcomas in Male Rats in the Dow Chemical
          Company (1980) Inhalation Study Derived from Four
          Different Models 	  3-28
 4-1      Sample Human Exposure Model (HEM) Output 	  4-4
 4-2      Sample from NATICH Data Base of Selected EPA Risk
          Analysis Information by Pollutant 	  4-5
 5-1      Summary of Primary Methods for Characterizing
          Uncertainty for Estimating Exposures 	  5-6
 9-1      Lifetime Excess Cancer Risk Estimates for Ethylene
          Dibromide (EDB) Exposure  	  9-9
10-1      Maximum Ground Level Concentrations and Associated
          Risk for Potential Carcinogens 	  10-6
10-2      Toxic Equivalency Factors for PCDDs and PCDFs  	  10-8
10-3      Michigan Division of Air Quality Carcinogenic Chemicals
          and Associated Air Concentrations Resulting in a
          1 x 10   Cancer Risk 	  10-11
11-1      Estimated Annual Incidence of Cancers in Las Vegas
          Valley Due to Urban Air Pollution 	  11-5
                                    xm

-------
                               LIST OF FIGURES
Figure                                                                Page
 1-1      Overview of Health Risk Assessment 	  1-3
 3-1      Hypothetical Dose-Response Curve 	  3-2
 3-2      Dose-Response Curve Showing Low-Dose Region 	  3-3
 3-3      Log-Log Plot of Risk, P(d), Versus Dose, d, of
          Aflatoxin 	  3-20
 9-1      CDHS Algorithm for Performing Dose-Response
          Assessments 	  9-5
                                     xv

-------
                              1.0  INTRODUCTION

1.1  PURPOSE

     The National Air Toxics Information Clearinghouse (the Clearinghouse)
has been established by the EPA Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards
(OAQPS) in coordination with the State and Territorial Air Pollution Program
Administrators (STAPPA) and the Association of Local Air Pollution Control
Officials (ALAPCO) for the purpose of aiding information transfer among
Federal, State, and local air quality management agencies.  This report has
been published as part of that effort.
     The purpose of this report is to describe the basic principles and
assumptions associated with a qualitative and quantitative carcinogenic risk
assessment and to illustrate its features using several examples of risk
assessment done by EPA and State and local agencies.  Risk assessment as  it
applies to air pollutants has been emphasized.  While the entire risk
assessment process is described, the focus of the report is the
dose-response assessment step of a quantitative risk assessment.  The report
is intended to help readers to better understand and interpret a risk
assessment rather than to provide instructions that would enable them to
conduct a quantitative dose-response assessment.  The report is aimed at
managers and staff members in State and local agencies who are interested in
understanding the use of quantitative carcinogenic risk assessment for
evaluating emissions of toxic pollutants.

1.2  ORGANIZATION

     This report is divided into two parts.  Part 1, Sections 1.0 through
7.0,  describes general risk assessment methodologies, uses of risk
assessment,  and resource requirements.  The EPA's approach to quantitative
cancer risk assessment is the main focus of Part 1.  Part 2, Sections 8.0
through 11.0,  gives four examples of chemical-specific quantitative cancer
risk assessments.  The example risk assessments were performed by the

                                    1-1

-------
Northeast States for Coordinated Air Use Management (NESCAUM),  the States of
California and Michigan, and the local  air pollution control  division of
Clark County (Las Vegas), Nevada.  Following the text of the  report are a
glossary of terms associated with quantitative risk assessment  and
appendices containing EPA Guidelines for Carcinogen Risk Assessment,  the
weight-of-evidence classification scheme developed  by the International
Agency for Research on Cancer,  and a list of cancer information sources.

1.3  DEFINITION OF QUANTITATIVE CARCINOGENIC RISK ASSESSMENT

     Quantitative carcinogenic  risk assessment is a process by  which a
factual base of information is  used to estimate the probability of
developing cancer due to exposure to a specific chemical.  This report
follows the four-component process described in Guidelines for  Carcinogen
Risk Assessment developed by EPA (EPA,  1986b).  This approach is consistent
with and draws upon the scientific principles of carcinogen risk assessment
developed by the Office of Science and Technology Policy (OSTP, 1985).
     The four components of a risk assessment as defined by the guidelines
are:

     1.   Hazard identification - a review of relevant biological and
          chemical information  bearing on whether or not a chemical may pose
          a human carcinogenic  hazard;
     2.   Dose-response assessment - a definition of the relationship
          between the dose of an agent and the magnitude of response,
          usually including a quantitative description of the relationship
          of dose to response;
     3.   Exposure assessment - an estimate of the extent of exposure to
          which the populations of interest are likely to be subject; and
     4.   Risk characterization - the integration of hazard identification,
          dose-response assessment, and exposure assessment in a framework
          to help judge the significance of the risk estimate.

Figure 1-1 illustrates these four steps and lists the main concerns of each
step.

                                    1-2

-------
                  Pollutant Selection
               Pollutant Prloritizatlon
                 Hazard Identification

•  Substances Present in Ambient Air (from emissions,
   atmospheric transformation, etc.)
t  Substances Associated with Health Effects
•  Weight-of-Evidence Evaluation
               Dose-Response Assessment

•  Qualitative or Quantitative Assessment of Potency
                 Exposure Assessments

   Estimation of Emission or Release Rates
   Identification of Exposure Routes
   Modeling of Environmental Transport
   Evaluation of Environmental Fate
   Identification of People Exposed
   Estimation of Toxic Substances Intakes
•
t
   Risk Characterization/Uncertainty Analyses

Integration of Hazard Identification, Dose-Response
Assessment, and Exposure Assessment
Weight-of-Evidence Evaluation
Evaluation of Uncertainty in Assessment Process
Figure 1-1.  Overview of Health Risk Assessment
                         1-3

-------
     This report focuses primarily on the basic  processes  and  assumptions
associated with the dose-response assessment  component.  Other steps  in  the
risk assessment process are described in order to  place  dose-response
assessment in the proper context and to illustrate all of  the  components of
a complete risk assessment.  These other components have been  extensively
reviewed elsewhere (OSTP, 1985;  EPA, 1985b,  1986a, 1986c).   In addition, a
previous Clearinghouse publication entitled  "Methods for Pollutant Selection
and Prioritization" reviews in part the hazard identification  component  of
the risk assessment process (NATICH, 1986a).   This report  provides examples
of how some State and local agencies have chosen pollutants for risk
assessment work.  If readers are familiar with these publications, they  may
wish to focus on Section 3.0, Dose-Response  Assessment.
     Agencies often use quantitative cancer  risk assessments in making
decisions about regulating the emissions of  known or suspect carcinogens.
These decisions may be necessary based on existing ambient levels of air
toxics or due to proposed new facilities which would increase emissions of
substances of concern.  The review of the factual  data base undertaken  in a
risk assessment is distinctly different from risk management or the process
of considering policy alternatives in order  to select the most appropriate
regulatory action that could be taken to reduce the public's exposure to
known or suspect carcinogens.  Risk management relies in part on the
scientific results of risk assessment.  Section 6.0 discusses risk
management.
                                    1-4

-------
                         2.0  HAZARD IDENTIFICATION

     Hazard identification is the first step in a cancer risk assessment.
The purpose of cancer hazard identification is to determine qualitatively
whether exposure to a given substance is likely to produce a carcinogenic
response  (EPA, 1986b).  Hazard identification typically includes a review of
several types of information such as the physical and chemical properties of
a chemical, and the results of short-term toxicity tests, long-term
bioassays and epidemiologic studies.  Each type of information is discussed
in Sections 2.1 through 2.5.  Since the available information on the
carcinogenic potential of a chemical is rarely, if ever, conclusive, results
and conclusions derived from the different types of information are combined
and the judgment concerning potential human carcinogenicity is developed
considering the total weight of evidence.  Weight-of-evidence classification
schemes are discussed in Section 2.6.  Table 2-1 summarizes the general
types of  information used in hazard identification and compares various
features of each type of information.

2.1  PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL PROPERTIES

     The first stage in determining whether or not a chemical is a potential
carcinogen is gathering all of the available information about the chemical.
Often, the most readily available information is on the physical and
chemical properties and the molecular structure.  Chemical and physical
properties which are useful in evaluating a chemical's carcinogenic
potential include solubility, stability, sensitivity to pH, and chemical
reactivity (OTA, 1981).  These properties are of interest in that they will
affect a large number of factors in the risk assessment (e.g., absorption
into the body; partitioning in various media, such as air, water, soil;
decay rates; etc.).
                                    2-1

-------













UJ
I—I
Of.
UJ «— .
•^™ ^"^
UJ CO
a at
i— i
o
UJ t—
—1 O
CD ^"^


> O
< "-H
Z
00 UJ
1— CD
GO O
UJ Z
o
u. a:
o «t
o
o o
I—I J__
• 1
 UJ
1— 1
— 1 h-
S UJ
UJ Q-
z o
UJ O£
CD a.
*
1



1«LJ
CO
t^c
1—











S
<« -H
M *J
- n
B 0
o a.
to n
3 -t
O 4J
§3
0  MV'Qf^ «iu
u« -IB -HtOBU -Id
4 u « O 9 M O
~^B ^00 ^Blt <~l
« -i u no it^nu MB
uBv uB uu«^ o S
*4MX ^>^  E o S « o S S3
0)4JM 01H 0)OUS VX
X«3 Xit XO.3 X
U-QIH 00 0 « n X UK

V «
•J 5 V 5 w IH
^ s •; ti ? °
1J 4J 00 11 • 4JOO*H "0 91
o -j ai ja n -i u o v^u
B uiBB «B UUVB
«l~ O^O« O^» « O > 0)
vntiB auto a o -j c -< TI
-i « > S ^»o»o ^«B op^
J3 O -1 0 «BB At) 0 0! It O
B -O " fl «3S-< •IS'O « >4 to 0
« It^E VltfOO VIl-H «1 V»4
nMoo nuBU TI o o 4MB
«0«> ti -O »«4
M > «l H 00 -1 BU3 -1 t) -1 > u «
3 -J -1 3 0 41O 4 B4B P S u P n
M ^o-i 6«6
VI4IX ndV VI4VO
^M^H ^<*O rH-iff) ^IU*H*^
(« 3 M 4Z0n 43- « -O P
OP4 O O M S OH4>I O U 3 4
-4Or^ -4 39 ^UOB *^VP^
S3-4 S>B"iP BQ § Bo*t3
Sue «P4» « 1 >• 1 « § o-
X P -H X -4 $ ^ -2 3 4 3 X 3 C 0
u n «i o » S " u P a X o o -4 a


v V n
>M » M
X 4 •-> « On
-^ u o n x P «
-i ^ p x e
9 U in B -3
n M n X B X w
n J! VJ440 0 P »
XV C « -O B U B -4 00 M X-l

c V
xx - o
WO « B n n B
tl U 4 -* -H -H
-44 « -1 4 4 -
8 M X v B q n
So o-3 -3 P
XX B C 4
O 4 4 ^ 4 4 M
M M U 4J U » n
nun ii 3 o o- B
a -" P P P 4 400 4
4nn o -i P w- S
tu 4 » 4 3 C BV 3
« « P mo-4 M^> a
00
go
r*
4 u n v X O
r-l 3 -4 U 4 -<
3 p n i n 8
O U X u n « S
«?'-' »4 W 4 "O
O *J 3 .£ V *4 o,
Z n 3 U) U a M
2-2

-------
2.2  STRUCTURE/ACTIVITY RELATIONSHIPS

     As mentioned above, in addition to the physical and chemical  properties
of a chemical, information about the molecular structure is often readily
available.  Comparing the structure of a chemical with those of known
carcinogens and noncarcinogens can give some indication of the likelihood
that the chemical under study will have carcinogenic potential.  For
instance, 8 of the first 14 carcinogens regulated by the Occupational Safety
and Health Administration were aromatic amines.  Certain molecular
structures or substructures have been associated with carcinogenicity and
structural similarity can be used to suggest which agents are more or less
likely to have a carcinogenic potential.  For example, the structural
relationship between chlorinated dibenzo-p-dioxins and chlorinated
dibenzofurans have been used to show a relationship between structure/
activity and carcinogenic potency (EPA, 1987).  Carcinogens are found in a
number of chemical classes and, within most classes, chemicals differ
greatly with respect to the nature and extent of carcinogenic activity
(OTA, 1981).

2.3  PHARMACOKINETIC INTERACTIONS

     Pharmacokinetics is the study of absorption, distribution, metabolism,
and excretion of chemicals by the body.  These mechanisms can all alter the
biological effects of a chemical in both a qualitative and quantitative
manner.  Although only a few chemicals have been studied in detail,
pharmacokinetic differences have been shown to be very important in
extrapolating data from test systems (e.g., short-term tests, bioassays) to
possible human effects.  Many differences in response between species and
among individuals within a species are due to differences in
pharmacokinetics.  Pharmacokinetic interactions can be extremely complex and
lack of specific information on a chemical results in scientific uncertainty
over the true impact of a chemical exposure and requires the use of a
multitude of conservative assumptions in the hazard identification process.
                                    2-3

-------
The following subsections very briefly discuss some possible implications  of
pharmacokinetic interactions on the hazard identification  process.   Further
discussion of pharmacokinetics can be found in Hayes,  1982.

2.3.1  Absorption

     Although a chemical  exposure may be from a number of  different routes,
the amount of chemical absorbed into the body (and subsequently distributed
to the sensitive tissue or organ) is important information.   Cancer studies
in animals generally use an exposure route and methodology that maximize
absorption.  Information on absorption in the nonlaboratory situation is
very scarce and, for humans, a number of assumptions must  frequently be made
regarding potential absorption.  When possible, actual estimations of
absorptions should be documented and taken into account in calculating risk.
Factors that control the inhaled dose of a pollutant are related to the
significant mechanisms by which aerosols and gases may be  deposited or taken
up in the lung.  Extensive discussions of aerosol deposition and gas
absorption appear in EPA, 1982 and EPA, 1986e.

2.3.2  Distribution

     Distribution refers to the transport of a chemical through the body by
physical means.  The body has several barriers to the free transport of
chemicals (e.g., cell or tissue membranes) and this can alter the
distribution of a chemical and the possible adverse health effects.  The
effects of chemical distribution have been best described for pharmaceutical
agents where the lack of distribution to certain organs is relied upon to
limit unwanted side effects.  Distribution is altered by the chemical
properties of the agent (e.g., ionic versus nonionic, lipophilic versus
hydrophilic) and to some extent the route of exposure.  Some distribution
can still occur after environmental exposure has ceased due to release of
substances stored in the body.  For instance, lead can be stored in the bone
and later released under certain physiological conditions related to calcium
balance.
                                    2-4

-------
2.3.3  Metabolism

     Metabolism refers to the chemical alteration of a substance by
enzymatic processes within the body.  Metabolism Is a normal function of the
body and, In addition to generating energy and/or new chemicals for
physiological processes, is an important component in removing exogenous
chemicals from the body.  There are a large number of enzyme systems that
act on different chemical substrates to produce very specific chemical
changes.  In general, for exogenous chemicals, these changes tend to make
the compound more hydrophilic (water soluble) which increases the rate at
which it is excreted.
     For many chemicals, metabolism is a critical step in generating a
carcinogenic response.  While the parent material may have relatively few or
no carcinogenic properties, metabolism can generate an "active" intermediate
chemical which, by being more reactive, can initiate or promote a
carcinogenic response.  Many organic chemical carcinogens and possibly some
metal compounds require metabolic activation in order to exert their
cancer-inducing properties (OSTP, 1985).  For example, benzo(a)pyrene must
be metabolized to reach its carcinogenic form.  Cytochrome P450 enzymes,
integral in the metabolic activation of many compounds, are found primarily
in the liver and to a lesser extent in the lung and other tissues.
     Metabolism is also one factor  in pharmacokinetics that has been  shown
to vary widely between species of animals, to be very dependent upon  the
amount of a specific chemical present, and even to show variability between
individuals of the same species.  For hazard identification purposes, it is
often assumed that humans react like the most sensitive test species.
However, for risk assessment and for determining the human cancer potential
from chemicals shown to be carcinogenic in animals, intraspecies variability
and alteration of metabolic pathways by saturation of primary pathways are
important considerations in evaluating the usefulness of animal data  for
extrapolation to humans.  These considerations are discussed further  under
Toxicologic Effects (Section 2.5).
                                    2-5

-------
2.3.4  Excretion

     Excretion is the removal of exogenous and waste chemicals from the
body.  In addition to urine and fecal material, the skin and lungs also
serve to remove waste materials from the body as do tears,  milk,  and other
secretions.  Some materials are excreted unchanged by metabolic processes,
while others are excreted only after being metabolized.   Excretion of
chemicals in milk may warrant special consideration in a risk assessment due
to the potential exposure via consumption of dairy products from cattle and
exposure of nursing infants.

2.4  ROUTES OF EXPOSURE

     The potential environmental exposure pathways for the  chemical under
evaluation may also be important in focusing the hazard identification
process.  The carcinogenic response for some chemicals depends on the route
of exposure.  Human exposure to environmental carcinogens can occur by
dermal contact, inhalation, ingestion, or a combination of these routes of
exposure.  There may be route-dependent differences in molecular,
biochemical, and physical parameters.  For example, dermal  exposure of
sensitized individuals to nickel can result in dermatitis but is not known
to produce a carcinogenic response (EPA, 1985a).  However,  studies have
shown inhalation exposure to certain forms of nickel produced a carcinogenic
response (EPA, 1985a).  Differences in carcinogenic response between routes
of exposure are often due to pharmacokinetic differences (e.g., absorption,
metabolism).  For example, many metals and metal compounds are substantially
more carcinogenic following inhalation exposures versus ingestion  because
these agents are not absorbed well from the gastrointestinal tract.  Also,
depending on the route of exposure, the effect of an agent can be  altered  as
a result of interaction with factors that are  in association with, but not
actually part of, an organism.  For example, studies have shown  interactions
between smoking and certain inhaled carcinogens  (e.g., asbestos).  The
result is that a chemical that  shows a carcinogenic response from  one route
                                    2-6

-------
of exposure may not show a response from a different route of exposure.
Route of exposure can also alter the tissue or tissues affected by cancer as
well as the potency of the agent.

2.5  TOXICOLOGIC EFFECTS

2.5.1  Short-Term Predictive Tests

     As shown In Table 2-1, short-term tests are so named because of the
relatively short length of time needed to complete the experiments - from
less than one day up to about eight months.  There has been a growing
interest in short-term tests for genetic toxicity, because of the relatively
shorter time period needed to complete the test and because of the
relatively lower cost compared to long-term bioassays.  Many short-term
tests detect chemical interactions with DMA and provide evidence on whether
a chemical may cause mutations.  There is evidence that many chemical
carcinogens exhibit mutagenic activity (OTA, 1981), thus, these tests are
useful as screening tools, providing preliminary evidence of carcinogenic
potential.
     Short-term tests are usually categorized as either la vitro, a test not
conducted on an entire complex living organism; or in vivo, a test conducted
on an intact living organism.  In vitro short-term test systems include gene
mutation, chromosome effects, DNA damage and repair, and cellular
transformation.  One of the most widely used in vitro gene mutation tests is
the Ames test, developed by microbiologist Bruce Ames.  This test measures
the capacity of a chemical to cause mutations in Salmonella tvphimurium. a
bacterium that is quickly and easily grown in the laboratory and is well
understood genetically.  The Ames test involves mixing the chemical under
test with a bacterial culture and then manipulating the culture so that only
mutated bacteria will grow.  The number of mutated bacteria 1s a measure of
the potency of the tested material as a mutagen (OTA, 1981).
     Some chemicals act as mutagens interacting with DNA only after they are
metabolized, often by enzymes in the liver.  Liver extracts are often added
to an Ames test system to provide a mechanism for these metabolic activation
changes to be accomplished (OTA, 1981).

                                    2-7

-------
     The Ames test 1s reported to detect known  carcinogens  as mutagens  with
a frequency as high as 90 percent.  A positive  Ames  test  shows  that  an  agent
1s a mutagen and suggests that it may be a carcinogen.   In  tests  performed
by Ames and his associates, 90 percent of a group of known  carcinogens
tested were found to be mutagenic, giving the test a 10 percent false
negative rate.  They also found 88 percent of a group of noncarcinogens were
identified as not mutagenic, giving a false positive rate of 12 percent.
Dr. Ames has shown, however, that the test performs more reliably on certain
classes of compounds.  For example, he has shown that his test  does  not work
well with either halogenated hydrocarbons or metals (OTA, 1981).
     Other short-term in vitro tests can detect mutagenesis in  bacteria and
bacterial viruses, yeast, and cultured mammalian cells, as  well as
interference with chromosomal mechanics, disruption of DNA  synthesis and
DNA repair mechanisms in bacteria and other organisms, and  transformation of
cultured cells.  These tests often involve the use of cell  culture systems
in which cells from animal or human tissue are grown and manipulated in the
laboratory.  Cell cultures can be manipulated to serve as assays for
mutagens and for chemicals that interfere with chromosomal  mechanics
(e.g., chromosomal translocation, sister chromatid exchange, and DNA
damage), but the most directly applicable use of cultured cells for
carcinogen identification involves in vitro transformation.  "Transformation"
means that cultured cells exposed to chemical carcinogens display changes in
normal morphology and growth characteristics, resembling tumor cells
(OTA, 1981).  This is theoretically a more direct measure of potential
careinogenicity.
     Short-term in vivo tests are conducted on an intact living organism.
Such tests include mutagenesis affecting mouse hair color,  effects on
chromosomal mechanics in mammals, and tests done by injecting transformed
cells Into an intact organism, most often a rodent (OTA, 1981).
     Opinions differ about the use of short-term tests in carcinogen
identification.  In 1981, the Office of Technology Assessment addressed this
debate noting that "the majority view is that the [short-term] tests are
most useful as a screen to determine a chemical's potential carcinogenicity"
(OTA, 1981).  Generally, a battery of short-term tests can help reduce  the
                                    2-8

-------
likelihood of false negatives (carcinogens that are not detected) and false
positives (noncardnogens that are falsely detected) (OTA, 1981).  It is
important to note that short-term tests typically focus on an endpoint
different from cancer (e.g., mutations, chromosome aberrations, DNA
damage/repair).  The EPA guidelines note that lack of positive results in a
short-term test does not provide the basis for discounting positive results
in long-term animal bioassays (EPA, 1986b).  Positive results from
short-term tests for genetic toxicity, however, add to the overall weight of
evidence for carcinogenicity.  Short-term tests in themselves are generally
not considered sufficient to determine carcinogenicity and/or support
regulations.

2.5.2  Lona-Term Animal Bioassavs for Cancer

     In long-term animal bioassays for cancer, test animals are used as
surrogates for humans since a basic premise of toxicology is that effects
seen in test animals are presumed to be applicable to humans.  Noting that
this premise is frequently questioned with regard to human cancer, the
National Research Council (NRC) has explained that cancer in humans and
animals is strikingly similar, adding, "virtually every form of human cancer
has an experimental counterpart, and every form of multicellular organism is
subject to cancer, including insects, fish, and plants" (NRC, 1977).
Although cancer as an endpoint may be similar in humans and test animals,
the notion of test animals as "little humans" is an inappropriate
oversimplification.  Many biological differences between animals and humans
must be considered in extrapolating animal test results to possible human
effects.  Extrapolation is discussed in Section 3.0.
     In long-term cancer bioassays, the chemical under study is administered
to laboratory animals (frequently rats and mice) for their lifetime via a
route that ideally is the same as, or as close as technically possible to,
the one by which human exposure would occur.  As the test animals die or are
killed during or at the conclusion of the study, they are examined for the
presence of tumors (OTA, 1981).  Data collected from bioassays may also
include precancerous changes, the presence of unusual tumors, time to tumor,
                                    2-9

-------
the presence of benign versus malignant tumors,  toxicologic effects other
than those related to cancer, and subchronic data including organ effects.
Guidelines for conducting bioassays have been developed and are described in
Section 3.0.  These guidelines are also useful to those who would use data
from a specific bioassay for a risk assessment because they help the user
judge the quality of the methodology.
     Compared to short-term tests, animal bioassays take considerably longer
to perform (2 to 5 years) and are much more costly.  Short-term tests may
cost from $100 to a few thousand dollars for each test while each long-term
bioassay could range from $400,000 to  over $1 million (OTA, 1981).  However,
as discussed below, the results from long-term bioassays are considered more
relevant.  Also, in contrast to epidemiologic studies (Section 2.6),
multiple variables (e.g., diet, environmental conditions) are easier to
control in an animal study.
     Bioassays are extremely useful, but their use is not without
difficulties.  Six problem areas are discussed below:  (1) biological
similarity and differences between animals and humans, (2) sample size,
(3) super-sensitivity of test animals, (4) the significance of benign versus
malignant tumors,  (5) the role of underlying toxicity, (6) overwhelming body
detoxification mechanisms, and (7) multiple pollutant exposure.  These
problems are discussed here to make the reader aware that these points
warrant consideration in review of a bioassay rather than to discourage the
use of such studies.  It is important to note that all Federal regulatory
agencies accept the use of animal test results as predictors of carcinogenic
risk for humans (OTA, 1981).
     In regard to the first problem area listed above, the issue of
biological similarities between human and animals, differences in
pharmacokinetics, size, and patterns of inhalation between rodents and other
test animals and humans, should be considered in interpreting the
significance of the results.  Metabolic studies have shown that most
differences between humans and experimental animals are quantitative rather
than qualitative, supporting the idea that animal results can be used to
predict human responses (OTA, 1981).
                                    2-10

-------
     The number of test animals used has been the subject of great concern
because of the fact that the test animals may be serving as surrogates for
more than 200 million people in the United States, and potentially for far
more worldwide.  While it is desirable to enhance the sensitivity of the
test, it is not feasible to use very many animals.  A sufficient number of
animals should be used so that at the end of the study enough animals from
each group are available for thorough pathological evaluation.  For such
reasons, it has been recommended that each dose group and concurrent control
group should contain at least 50 animals of each sex.  At least one
concurrent untreated control group, identical in every respect to the
exposed groups, except for exposure to the test substance, should be used.
In certain studies, such as with inhalation exposures that require unique
housing conditions, it may also be appropriate to include an additional
concurrent control group housed under conventional conditions (OSTP, 1985).
When careful attention is paid to experimental design, the test is more
likely to achieve the maximum reliability and the results are more amenable
to statistical evaluation.
     It is important to consider the impact the use of a limited number of
animals has on the statistical power to detect an effect.  If the
spontaneous (background) incidence rates are low, it is generally possible
to detect as little as a 5 to 10 percent increase incidence in an average
bioassay.  Alterations of less than 5 percent are not detectable without the
use of historical controls.  For example, if the population of the United
States was exposed to an agent which produced a 4.5 percent response (which,
as noted above, is not detectable in a bioassay), approximately 9,000 cancer
cases may be seen.  The use of historical controls increases the number of
animals used for comparison and consequently increases the power of the
statistical analyses (i.e., the ability to detect an effect).
     Some species or strains of test animals or organs of certain species or
strains of animals are very sensitive to carcinogens and this sensitivity
complicates the use of data from such animals.  Many times sensitive species
are used in bioassays because they are sensitive and increase the likelihood
of positive results.  Comparative studies have shown that neither rats nor
mice are particularly sensitive species.  The possibility of a false result
                                    2-11

-------
can be reduced by the use of two species  Instead  of one  (OSTP,  1985).
Numerous studies suggest that the mouse liver Is  a  sensitive  organ,  such
that when mouse liver tumors are the only evidence  of carclnogenlclty,  test
results are worthy of additional scrutiny (OTA,  1981;  OSTP, 1985;
EPA, 1986b).  Due to this difficulty, the EPA is  currently preparing a
report that discusses and provides guidance in the  interpretation  of mouse
liver tumors.
     The International Agency for Research on Cancer (IARC) considers mouse
liver and lung tumors as only "limited evidence"  for carcinogenicity while
OSHA accepts mouse liver tumors as "indicators of carcinogenicity" if
judgment and experience are used in interpreting  the data (OTA,  1981).  The
EPA Carcinogen Risk Assessment Guidelines explain that EPA would accept the
sole response of mouse liver tumors as "sufficient  evidence"  of
carcinogenicity (assuming other conditions for this classification are  met)
unless, on a case-by-case basis, other factors warranted a downgraded
classification of "limited" evidence.  Factors that may warrant a
downgrading of the classification include an increased incidence of tumors
only in the highest dose group and/or only at the end of the  study; no
substantial dose-related increase in the  proportion of tumors that are
malignant; the occurrence of tumors that  are predominantly benign; no
dose-related shortening of the time to the appearance of tumors; negative or
inconclusive results from a spectrum of short-term  tests for  mutagenic
activity; and the occurrence of excess tumors only  in a single sex
(EPA, 1986b).  The significance of mouse  liver tumors continues to be highly
controversial and the focus of considerable scientific debate.
     Related to the condition of sensitivity is the condition of background
incidence.  Some species have high background rates of spontaneous tumor
formation.  Some varieties of mice have a high background of liver tumor
incidence.  This is discussed in Section  3.0.
     Benign tumors are tumors that do not spread and invade other tissues or
organs.  Malignant tumors, by contrast, spread to other tissues and cause
additional tumors.  The issue here is whether benign tumors found in
experimental animals should be taken as evidence that a chemical causes
cancer.  The EPA risk assessment guidelines state,  "it is recognized that
                                    2-12

-------
chemicals that induce benign tumors frequently also induce malignant tumors,
and that benign tumors often progress to malignant tumors."  The EPA
guidelines also add that the Agency will generally combine the incidence of
benign and malignant tumors, unless evidence is available to indicate that
the benign tumors produced by a given chemical do not have the potential to
progress to malignant tumors.  If an increased incidence of benign tumors is
observed in the absence of malignant tumors, the evidence will usually be
considered as "limited" evidence of carcinogenicity.  It should be noted
that while benign tumors only produce limited evidence of carcinogenicity,
the adverse, potentially life-threatening nature of the tumors should be
considered.
     Large doses, usually exceeding human exposure levels, are necessary to
overcome the inherent low statistical sensitivity of bioassays (OSTP, 1984).
Bioassay guidelines state that one treatment group should receive the
maximum tolerated dose (MTD), the highest dose that can be given that would
not alter the animals' normal life span from effects other than cancer
(OTA, 1981).  High dose levels are controversial because the high doses "may
themselves produce altered physiologic conditions which can qualitatively
affect the induction of malignant tumors" (OSTP, 1984).  OSTP advocates
using "reasonable scientific certainty" that the dose used meets the
objectives of maximum test sensitivity without introducing qualitative
distortions.
     The use of high experimental doses presents another problem in
evaluating the significance of animal study results.  The animal and human
bodies may handle low and high dose levels in a different manner.  If too
much of a particular chemical is present, then a normal metabolic pathway
may become saturated and secondary pathways will begin to be used to a
greater extent.  If the secondary metabolic pathway and not the primary
metabolic pathway produces the carcinogenic intermediate, then the high
doses that are used in the experiment are responsible for producing a
disproportionately greater carcinogenic response.  At exposure and related
dose levels expected in environmental situations, the carcinogenic
metabolites would be either much lower or nonexistent and the results of the
animal study would grossly overestimate the carcinogenic hazard.
                                    2-13

-------
Alternatively, if the carcinogenic pathway is  saturated  at  high  doses,  the
effective dose of the carcinogen at a high and low exposure concentration
may be equivalent.  In this case, a smaller fraction  of  the exposure
concentration would be metabolized to the carcinogenic intermediate than at
low doses and linear extrapolation from the high dose exposure may
underpredict the response occurring at a lower exposure  concentration.  An
example of this scenario is presented in a carcinogenic  risk assessment for
1,3-butadiene (EPA, 1985b).  Unfortunately, not enough information is
usually available on most chemicals to estimate the effect  of altered
metabolic pathways.
     The fact that animal studies generally only examine the effect of a
single chemical is a limitation.  Single chemical studies are necessitated
by cost considerations and the difficulties of interpreting multiple
chemical study results.  The main concern is that the limited data available
on multiple exposures suggest that in certain  situations the combined effect
of exposure to two chemicals exceeds the effect expected by a simple
summation of the effects of each chemical alone.  In other words, the
combined effects may be synergistic or antagonistic to a carcinogenic
response.  In the absence of evidence, EPA uses a summation approach  when
considering the impact of multichemical exposures (EPA,  1986c).
     Bioassay results will sometimes show toxic effects  other than
carcinogenicity (e.g., suppression of immune system,  organ damage, endocrine
disturbances) that bear on the evaluation of potential carcinogenicity.  The
focus here is to show the alternative mechanisms of carcinogenicity since
the Guidelines for Carcinogen Risk Assessment  (EPA, 1986b)  primarily  focus
upon assumptions that derive from a genotoxic  mechanism of action.

2.6  EPIDEMIOLOGIC DATA

     Epidemiology is the study of the distribution of disease in human
populations and the factors that influence disease distribution.  In  the
hazard identification step of cancer risk assessment, epidemiologic studies,
if available, are used to examine the association between human population
exposure to agents and the observed occurrence of cancer.  Epidemiologic
                                    2-14

-------
studies examine groups of Individuals unique in exposure to a chemical  or
process of interest, and attempt to define differences in cancer rates
between the exposed group and a reference group.  EPA and OSTP (EPA,  1986b
and OSTP, 1985) divide epidemiologic studies Into two categories,
descriptive studies and analytical studies.
     Descriptive studies are concerned with identifying the distribution or
patterns of disease in populations.  Examples of descriptive studies include
identification of high cancer rates in a certain geographical area such as
high bladder cancer rates in New Jersey males and excess mortality rates
from cancer of the mouth and throat, esophagus, colon, rectum, larynx,  and
bladder in the industrialized Northeast (OTA, 1981).  In descriptive
studies, prevalence, incidence, and mortality rates of cancer define the
levels of risk prevailing in different populations and permit comparisons
between groups.  Descriptive studies sometimes use a correlational or
ecological approach, in which the rate of disease is compared with the
spatial or temporal distribution of suspected risk factors (OSTP, 1985).
     OSTP and EPA agree that while descriptive studies are useful in
generating hypotheses and providing supporting data, they can rarely be used
to make a causal inference (OSTP, 1985; EPA, 1986b).  The primary weakness
is that data are collected on populations rather than individuals.
Information on the exposure status of people who have the disease and those
who do not within each population group is not known (OSTP, 1985).
     Analytical studies are based on data derived from observations of
individuals or relatively small groups of people.  The OSTP notes that these
types of studies are a principal means of determining human health hazards
of specific environmental exposure and agents (OSTP, 1985).  Two types of
common analytical epidemiologic studies are the case-control and cohort
studies.  Case-control studies compare individuals with the disease under
study (cases) with a group of similar individuals without the disease
(controls).  This type of study is sometimes called "retrospective" because
the presence or absence of the predisposing factor is determined for a time
in the past (OTA, 1981).  The carcinogenic properties of diethylstilbestrol
(DES) were identified through case-control studies.
                                    2-15

-------
     Cohort studies start by Identifying  a  group  of  individuals with  a
particular exposure and a similar group of  unexposed persons  and  following
both groups over time to determine subsequent  health outcomes (OSTP,  1985).
This type of study 1s sometimes called "prospective" because  it looks
forward from exposure to development of the disease  characteristic
(OTA, 1981).  The link between benzene exposure and  leukemia  was  established
through cohort studies.
     The OSTP cites several  strengths and limitations of epidemiologic  data
to detect a relationship between a specific exposure and an effect.
Epidemiologic studies directly evaluate the experience of human populations
and their response to various environmental exposures.  It is often  possible
to evaluate the consequences of an environmental  exposure in  the  same manner
in which it occurs in human populations.  One  of  the limitations  of
epidemiology is that evidence of an environmental hazard is usually  only
obtained from people with high to intermediate levels of exposure,  such as
experienced in occupational  settings, making the  detection of causal
relationships at low exposure levels difficult.   Additionally, large numbers
of human subjects are often needed to provide  a valid basis  for risk
estimates.  The EPA guidelines point out  that  epidemiologic studies  are
inherently capable of detecting only comparatively large increases in the
relative risk of cancer (EPA, 1986b).  Another problem often  encountered in
epidemiology is the lack of all but crude exposure data.  In  many cases, it
may be difficult to quantify the exposure level.   Finally, epidemiologic
studies cannot adjust for all risk factors  which  may have confounding
influences on the study results (OSTP, 1985).   Some possible  confounding
factors include the sensitivity of certain  subpopulations, genetic makeups,
socioeconomic conditions, and unknown exposure on the job or in hobby
activities.
     The EPA Guidelines for Carcinogen Risk Assessment state  that, "the
strength of the epidemiologic evidence for  carcinogenicity depends,  among
other things, on the type of analysis and on the  magnitude and specificity
of the response.  The weight of evidence  increases rapidly with the number
of adequate studies that show comparable  results  on populations exposed to
the same agent under different circumstances."  Criteria for judging the
                                    2-16

-------
adequacy of epidemiologic studies Include factors such as the proper
selection and characterization of exposed and control  groups, the adequacy
of duration and quality of follow-up, the proper identifications and
characterization of confounding factors and bias, the  appropriate
consideration of latency effects, the valid ascertainment of the causes of
morbidity and death, and the ability to detect specific effects
(EPA, 1986b).

2.7  WEIGHT OF EVIDENCE OF CARCINOGENICITY FOR ANIMAL  AND HUMAN STUDIES

     The question of how likely an agent is to be a human carcinogen can
only be examined within a framework that accounts for  the weight of evidence
of carcinogenicity.  This involves considering the quality and adequacy of
the data and the kinds and consistency of responses induced by a suspect
carcinogen.  The EPA Guidelines for Carcinogen Risk Assessment identify
three major steps to characterizing the weight of evidence for human
carcinogenicity:  (1) characterization of evidence from human and animal
studies individually, (2) combination of these two types of data for an
overall indication of human carcinogenicity, and (3) evaluation of all
supporting information to determine if the overall weight of evidence should
be modified (EPA, 1986b).
     The EPA has developed a system for classifying the overall weight of
evidence for carcinogenicity and has developed an adaptation of the IARC
approach for classifying the weight of evidence for human and animal data.
The Agency cautions that classification schemes should not be applied
mechanically, adding that hazard identification should include a narrative
summary of the strengths and weaknesses of the evidence in addition to its
categorization (EPA, 1986b).
     Under the IARC classification scheme, evidence of carcinogenicity in
experimental  animals is placed in one of the following groups:

     1.   Sufficient evidence of carcinogenicity is proved when there is an
          increased incidence of malignant tumors:  (a) in multiple species
          or strains; or (b) in multiple experiments (preferably with
                                    2-17

-------
          different routes  of administration or using different dose
          levels);  or (c) to an  unusual degree with regard to  incidence,
          site or type of tumor,  or  age at onset of tumor.  Additional
          evidence may be provided by  data on dose-response effects.
     2.    Limited evidence  of carcinogenicity is determined when the data
          suggest a carcinogenic effect but are limited because:   (a) the
          studies involve a single species, strain, and experiment; or
          (b)  the experiments are restricted by inadequate dosage  levels,
          inadequate duration of exposure to the agent, inadequate period of
          follow-up, poor survival,  too few animals, or inadequate reporting;
          or (c)  the neoplasms produced often occur spontaneously  and,  in
          the  past, have been difficult to classify as malignant by
          histological criteria  alone  (e.g., lung  adenomas and
          adenocarcinomas and liver  tumors in certain strains  of mice).
     3.    Inadequate evidence of carcinogenicity  is determined when,  because
          of major qualitative or quantitative limitations, the  studies
          cannot  be interpreted  as showing either  the presence or  absence  of
          a carcinogenic effect  (IARC, 1982;  IARC, 1984).
     4.    No evidence of carcinogenicity  applies when  several  adequate
          studies are available  which  show that, within the limits of the
          tests used, the  chemical or  complex mixture  is  not  carcinogenic.
          (This classification was added  by  IARC,  1984.)

     EPA has made the following  changes to  the  IARC scheme for classifying
animal data (EPA, 1986b):

     1.    An increased incidence of  combined  benign and  malignant tumors
          will be considered to  provide sufficient evidence of
          carcinogenicity  if the other criteria  defining  the  "sufficient"
          classification of evidence are met  (e.g., replicate studies,
          malignancy).  Benign and malignant  tumors will  be combined when
          scientifically defensible.
     2.    An increased incidence of  benign  tumors alone  generally
          constitutes "limited"  evidence of carcinogenicity.
                                    2-18

-------
     3.   An Increased Incidence of neoplasms that occur with  high
          spontaneous background Incidence (e.g.,  mouse liver  tumors  and  rat
          pituitary tumors In certain strains) generally constitutes
          "sufficient" evidence of cardnogenicity, but may be changed  to
          "limited" when warranted by the specific Information available  on
          the agent.
     4.   A "no data available" classification has been added.
     5.   A "no evidence of cardnogenlcity" classification has also  been
          added.  This operational classification  would include substances
          for which there is no increased incidence of neoplasms in at  least
          two well-designed and well-conducted animal  studies  of adequate
          power and dose 1n different species.  (When  saying this
          classification was added to the IARC scheme  by EPA,  EPA referenced
          IARC, 1982.)

     For classifying evidence of carcinogenicity from  studies  in humans,
IARC uses the following four groups (see  also Appendix B):

     1.   Sufficient evidence of carcinogenicity Indicates  that there 1s  a
          causal relationship between the exposure and human cancer.
     2.   Limited evidence of carcinogenicity Indicates that a causal
          interpretation is credible, but that alternative  explanations,
          such as chance, bias, or confounding factors, could  not adequately
          be excluded.
     3.   Inadequate evidence, which applies to both positive  and negative
          evidence, Indicates that one of two conditions prevailed:
          (a) there are few pertinent data; or (b) the available studies,
          while showing evidence of association, do not exclude chance,
          bias, or confounding factors.
     4.   No evidence applies when several adequate studies are available
          which do not show evidence of carcinogenicity.  (This
          classification was added by IARC in IARC, 1984.)
                                    2-19

-------
     EPA has made the following modifications to the IARC  approach
classifying evidence from human studies (EPA, 1986b):

     1.   The observation of a statistically significant association between
          an agent and life-threatening benign tumors  in humans has been
          included in the evaluation of risks to humans.
     2.   A "no data available" classification has been added.
     3.   A "no evidence of carcinogenicity" classification has been added.
          This classification indicates that no association was found
          between exposure and increased risk of cancer in well-conducted,
          well-designed, independent analytical epidemiologic studies.
          (When saying this classification was added to the IARC scheme, EPA
          referenced IARC, 1982.)

     The EPA classification system for the characterization of the overall
weight of evidence for carcinogenicity (animal, human, and other supportive
data) of a compound includes the following five groups (EPA, 1986b):

     Group A - Human Carcinogens;  Sufficient evidence from epidemiologic
     studies to support a causal association between exposure to the agents
     and cancer.
     Group B - Probable Human Carcinogens:  Limited evidence of human
     carcinogenicity based on epidemiologic studies or sufficient evidence
     of carcinogenicity based on animal studies.  This group is divided into
     two subgroups.  Group Bl is reserved for agents for which there is
     limited evidence of carcinogenicity from epidemiologic studies.  It is
     reasonable, for practical purposes, to regard an agent for which there
     is "sufficient" evidence of carcinogenicity in animals as if it
     presented a carcinogenic risk to humans.  Therefore, agents for which
     there is "sufficient" evidence from animal studies and for which there
     is "inadequate evidence" or "no data" from epidemiologic  studies would
     usually be categorized under Group B2.
                                    2-20

-------
     Group C - Possible Human Carcinogens;  Limited evidence of
     carcinogenicity in animals in the absence of human data.  This group
     includes a wide variety of evidence such as (a) a malignant tumor
     response in a single well-conducted experiment that does not meet
     conditions for sufficient evidence, (b) tumor responses of marginal
     statistical significance in studies having inadequate design or
     reporting, (c) benign but not malignant tumors with an agent showing no
     response in a variety of short-term tests for mutagenicity, and
     (d) responses of marginal statistical significance in a tissue known to
     have a high or variable background rate.
     Group D - Not Classifiable as to Human Carcinoqenicitv;  Inadequate
     human and animal evidence of carcinogenicity, or no data are available.
     Group E - Evidence of Noncarcinoqenicitv for Humans;  No evidence for
     carcinogenicity in at least two adequate animal tests in different
     species or in both adequate epidemiologic and animal studies.  The
     designation of an agent as being in Group E is based on the available
     evidence and should not be interpreted as a definitive conclusion that
     the agent will not be a carcinogen under any circumstances.

     Table 2-2 illustrates how evidence based on animal and human studies is
combined to yield a tentative assignment to one of the five categories
(EPA, 1986b).
                                    2-21

-------
         TABLE 2-2.  ILLUSTRATIVE CATEGORIZATION OF EVIDENCE BASED
                     ON ANIMAL AND HUMAN DATA (EPA, 1986b)a

Human
Evidence
Sufficient
Limited
Inadequate
No Data
No Evidence
Animal Evidence
Sufficient
A
Bl
B2
B2
B2
Limited
A
Bl
C
C
C
Inadequate
A
Bl
D
D
D
No Data
A
Bl
D
D
D
No Evidence
A
Bl
D
E
E
The above assignments are presented for illustrative purposes.  There may
be nuances in the classification of both animal  and human data indicating
that different categorizations than those given  in the table should be
assigned.  Furthermore, these assignments are tentative and may be modified
by ancillary evidence.  In this regard, all relevant information should be
evaluated to determine if the designation of the overall weight of evidence
needs to be modified.  Relevant factors to be included along with the tumor
data from human and animal studies include structure-activity relationships,
short-term test findings, results of appropriate physiological, biochemical,
and toxicological observations, and comparative  metabolism and pharmaco-
kinetic studies.  The nature of these findings may cause an adjustment of
the overall categorization of the weight of evidence.
                                   2-22

-------
                        3.0  DOSE-RESPONSE ASSESSMENT

     A dose-response assessment is the process of characterizing the
relationship between the exposure to an agent and the incidence of an
adverse health effect in exposed populations (NRC, 1983).   Although
dose-response assessments can be prepared for other types  of health effects,
this section of the report discusses dose-response assessments in which the
adverse health effect is cancer.  In assessments for carcinogens, the
response is normally expressed in terms of a probability or risk estimate,
or as an upper bound of the risk (OSTP, 1985).
     Dose-response evaluation is the second part of a complete risk
assessment because it provides the basis for the development of risk
estimates (e.g., a statement that describes the possible magnitude of either
individual or population health impacts).  It should be emphasized that
calculation of risk estimates (dose-response assessments)  does not require
that the agent be clearly shown to be carcinogenic in humans.  The
likelihood that an agent is a human carcinogen is a function of the "weight
of evidence" as described in Section 2.0.  It is important to present risk
estimates, appropriately qualified and interpreted, in those circumstances
in which there is a reasonable possibility that the agent is carcinogenic to
humans.
     The dose-response assessment is based on data obtained from
epldemiologic studies and/or animal experiments.  For pictorial purposes, a
data set may be plotted on a graph to help visualize the dose-response
curve.  Figure 3-1 shows hypothetical data and a dose-response curve with
the dose/exposure plotted on the x-axis and percent response (cancer
incidence) on the y-axis.  While the curve usually fits the observed data
well, it may not be representative of the data at very low doses.  Very low
doses are generally not used in animal experiments because a large number of
animals would be needed in order to detect a carcinogenic response at these
levels.  In addition, the occupational exposures found in many
epidemiologic studies display relatively high concentrations.  Figure 3-2
                                    3-1

-------
 0)
 (0
 c
 O
 Q.
 (0
 O
 DC
90-
80-
70-
60-
50-
40-
30-
20-
   •
10-
                     i • "Tr   i  • i  • • • i' •
                     50  100  200 400 800
       10  20
           Exposure/Dose
                                                          00
                                                          f-
Figure 3-1. Hypothetical Data and Dose-Response Curve
                          3-2

-------
 
-------
shows another hypothetical  dose-response curve that  depicts  the  more
frequent cases in which high doses and responses  in  an  animal  study are
plotted.  The portion of the dose-response curve  associated  with low  doses
is undefined in this case as shown in the figure  by  the dotted line.   In  the
actual ambient environment, humans are more likely to be exposed to much
lower concentrations or doses than are used in experimental  studies or
experienced in occupational settings.  Therefore,  the lower  end  of the
dose-response curve (bottom left portion in Figure 3-2) is generally  the
area of interest in environmental  risk assessments.   Since there is usually
no experimental or observational dose-response information about that area
of the curve, mathematical  models are used to extrapolate the curve from  the
observed data range into the low dose region.
     Section 3.0 of this report discusses how a dose-response curve is
constructed, extrapolation of animal  data to human data, and the various
mathematical models which can be used in extrapolating the dose-response
curve into the low dose region.  The discussions  of  these areas  are closely
related to some basic concepts in the current theories of carcinogenesis.
Therefore, a brief description of current theories on cancer, the multistage
process and the threshold/nonthreshold concept is provided.   The discussion
of carcinogenesis is presented to give a basic introduction  to the concepts
on which dose-response and risk assessment procedures are based, but  is not
intended to be a complete treatment of the subject.   References are given in
the text which will lead the reader to more detailed discussions of the
topic.

3.1  THE PROCESS OF CARCINOGENESIS

     Cancer is a broad term for a group of diseases  distinguished by the
uncontrolled proliferation of abnormal cells.  Cancers  in different body
organs may behave in different ways and are  identified by different names,
depending upon the original cell type.  For  example, malignant tumors  of
epithelial cells (cells that line organs or  cover organs) are known as
carcinomas, and malignant tumors of connective tissues  are known as
                                    3-4

-------
sarcomas.  (Other tumor types are defined in the glossary.)   In common
usage, the term carcinogen applies to any substance which can cause a
malignant tumor to develop.
     A cancerous cell is one that is altered in a largely unknown manner
such that it generates rapidly, increasing numbers of new altered cells to
which the parent cell has transmitted heritable alterations.  Groups of
altered cells are tumors.  They may also appear as individual foci or
metaplasia.
     The causes of cell changes leading to cancer are poorly understood.
Many agents that cause cancer interact with deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA) and
alter a cell's genotype.  An agent which has this effect may be called
genotoxic and/or a mutagen.  Such an agent produces a mutation.  Genotoxic
can also imply other toxic effects as well and thus, in terminology,
mutagenicity is a subset of genotoxicity.  Cellular mutation is often
considered to be an early stage in a multistage process leading to cancer.
However, the inheritance of a single mutation may or may not be sufficient
to produce cancer (NRC, 1986).  When DNA is damaged, cellular mechanisms can
act to repair the damage, or the cell may be eliminated by actions of the
immune system.  Therefore, some damage to DNA appears to be "reversible" and
may not in fact be disconcerting.  It is those mutational effects that
predispose a cell to cancer development that are a concern.   The "language"
of risk assessment has coined the term "epigenetic" to account for all other
(nonmutational) mechanisms that possibly operate in the carcinogenic
process.  Thus, the terms genotoxic, mutagenic, or epigenetic mechanisms are
sometimes used to roughly characterize the mechanisms of carcinogenesis.
     There are several theories on the nature of the carcinogenic process.
One favored theory is that carcinogenesis is a multistage process consisting
of at least three distinct steps:  initiation, promotion, and progression
(Weinstein, 1985).  The multistage nature of the process has been
experimentally demonstrated in cells of some animal tissues, including skin,
lung, liver, and bladder, and is thought to occur in human tissues in a
similar multistage process (NRC, 1986).  More complete discussions of the
multistage theory and carcinogenesis may be found in Becker  (1981), Farber
(1982), Farber and Cameron (1980), Slaga et al. (1980), Weinstein et al.
(1984), and OSTP (1985).

                                    3-5

-------
     The distinctions between three stages now identified as  part of the
multistage process (initiation,  promotion, progression)  are defined
experimentally, yet their exact  mechanisms are not well  understood
(NRC, 1986).  Each stage can be  influenced by age, sex,  and diet of an
organism as well as hormonal activity and environmental  factors.  The stages
may involve different cellular and biochemical mechanisms (Weinstein, 1985).
Each stage of the multistage process is described below.
     The first step in the multistage process is initiation,  which is
thought to involve a heritable change in the cell through a change to its
ONA (IARC, 1982).  A single application of some chemicals is  sufficient to
initiate the carcinogenic process (Weinstein, 1985).  Substances which are
initiators are mutagens that act either directly or indirectly by forming
electrophilic species (metabolites) that modify or damage the DNA structure
(NRC, 1986).  Several DNA-carcinogen adducts (products of chemical addition
reactions), formed by the reaction of electrophilic species with
nucleophilic areas in DNA, have been identified in DNA recovered from
reactions of carcinogens in cell cultures and intact organisms treated with
carcinogens (IARC, 1982).  The initiation step in the multistage process is
considered reversible only by death of the initiated cell (NRC,  1986) or by
DNA repair mechanisms to correct the damage.  The lesion produced by
initiation is thought to persist for an extended period of time.
     The second step in the multistage process is promotion of the initiated
cells and results in the production of new, albeit altered cells.  This
process is called cellular proliferation.  Chemicals called promoters may be
defined as agents that have very weak or no carcinogenic activity by
themselves, but enhance carcinogenic response when they are applied
following a dose of an initiator (Weinstein, 1985; NRC, 1986).  This series
of events has only been demonstrated in laboratory experiments  (NRC, 1986),
specifically in skin and liver carcinogenesis (OSTP, 1985).  Promoters are
generally not believed to interact with DNA.  Studies with several promoters
(phorbol esters, teleocidin, and aplysiatoxin) have shown that the site of
action for some promoters is the cell membrane (Weinstein, 1985).,  There is
some evidence that promotion involves several stages and, at early stages,
                                    3-6

-------
the actions of a first-stage promoter may be reversible (NRC,  1986).
Actions of second stage promoters are thought to be irreversible (NRC,  1986)
(see also Slaga et al., 1980).
     Individuals are continuously exposed to initiators in the ambient
environment.  Therefore, environmental exposure to promoters may be
sufficient to yield cancer.  Thus, even though promoters may show only  weak
carcinogenic activity by themselves, they cannot be ignored when considering
total environmental exposure and risk.
     The final stage in the multistage process, progression, is largely
undefined.  In this stage, cells become able to form tumors, become
malignant, and have the ability to metastasize (OSTP, 1985).  A cancer is
said to metastasize when parts of the cell mass leave the tissue area in
which they are growing and invade surrounding tissue or are transported to
other areas by the circulatory or the lymphatic system (NRC, 1986).
However, not all altered or mutated cells progress to malignant tumors
(OSTP, 1985).  Because tumors may continue to increase in their degree of
malignancy, progression is said to be a dynamic process (NRC, 1986).
     The classification of agents as initiators or promoters is not always
clear-cut.  Some agents can act as both an initiator and a promoter in the
same tissue; these agents are defined as complete carcinogens.  In fact,
most chemicals that are initiators are also complete carcinogens at higher
doses (NRC, 1986).  Also, some materials act as initiators in one tissue and
as a promoter in others (NRC, 1977).
     Examples of agents that are initiators or promoters include
2-acetylaminofTuorene acting as an initiator in rat liver and phenobarbitol
acting as a promoter in that tissue (Weinstein, 1985).  In mouse skin,
polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons act as initiators and phorbol esters act as
promoters (Weinstein, 1985).
     Another type of carcinogenic action is cocarcinogenesis.  In such
cases,  two (or more) compounds, when administered concurrently, increase the
probability of cancer development.  The difference between a cocarcinogen
and a promoter is the time frame required for administration of the agent.
Promoters act when applied after an initiator, while cocarcinogens must be
applied concurrently with an initiator.
                                    3-7

-------
     While the theory that cancer is a multistage process  is  relatively well
accepted, an in-depth knowledge of the exact mechanisms  of cancer is
unknown.  For example, as was discussed earlier,  carcinogens  are  thought to
act directly on cellular genetic material  as genotoxins  to alter  the  cell
genome.  There is some evidence, however,  that some carcinogens may not
affect DNA or may act indirectly on the genome to begin  the cancer process
(NRC, 1986; OSTP, 1985).  This hypothesis  is sometimes referred to as an
epigenetic mechanism of cancer.  Asbestos, for example,  is thought to not
damage DNA directly (NRC, 1986) although some of  the metallic ions in its
complex may.
     The exact mechanisms of cancer induction are still  not known.  It is
generally accepted, however, that carcinogenesis  is a multistage  process
that may involve the genome directly or indirectly (OSTP,  1985).   The change
to malignant tumors may involve oncogene activation or chromosome aberration
(NRC, 1986).  Oncogenes are naturally occurring genes that code for factors
that regulate cell growth (NRC, 1986).  About 40  of these genes have been
identified in either human or animal tumors.  Some oncogenes  have been shown
to be activated by chemical carcinogens (NRC, 1986).  The role of oncogenes
in the carcinogenic process is not well understood.  Initiation may involve
an alteration in DNA that allows the expression or increases  the expression
of an oncogene.  It has been suggested that chromosomal  abberations may
activate oncogenes by causing alterations in genetic information.
Chromosome aberrations are modifications of the normal chromosome complement
due to deletion, duplication, or rearrangement of genetic material.  Such
abberrations have been observed in some animal and human tumors  (NRC,  1986).

3.2  THE CONCEPT OF THRESHOLDS

     For most toxic effects, excluding cancer, there appears to be a
threshold dose below which no effects occur.  In  these cases, physiological
adaptation or homeostatic mechanisms are able to compensate for any  slight
effect, and no toxic effect is observed or, a sufficient dose of  the toxic
substance does not reach the target site  (organ)  and no toxic effect is
observed.  If effects did occur, normal repair processes are able to correct
                                    3-8

-------
any damage.  If an effect can be caused by a single irreversible molecular
interaction of an agent with its target, then one may expect that there
would be no threshold for such an agent.  As discussed in Section 3.1,  the
dominant view of carcinogenesis involves the idea that most agents that
cause cancer also cause irreversible damage to DNA (EPA,  1984b).  ONA damage
may be induced by very small doses and initiate the carcinogenic process.
Once initiated, this process continues to develop over time after the dose
or exposure is gone.  Thus, the assumption upon which many cancer risk
assessments are based is that there is no threshold dose  for carcinogens.
The importance of a no threshold assumption is examined in the discussion  of
low-dose extrapolation modeling.
     Not all scientists, however, agree that a no threshold approach is true
for all carcinogens.  Indeed, at the current stage of knowledge, "mechanistic
evidence for DNA repair mechanisms or other biological responses does not
prove the existence of, the lack of, or the location of a threshold for
carcinogenesis" (OSTP, 1985).  Also, "the presence or absence of a threshold
for one step in the multistage process does not necessarily determine the
presence or absence of a threshold for the whole process" (OSTP, 1985).

3.3  SELECTION OF DATA FROM WHICH TO DERIVE THE DOSE-RESPONSE ASSESSMENT

     Two basic types of data are used in dose-response assessments:
epidemiologic studies of human populations and experimental studies in
animals.  These types of studies were discussed in Section 2.0, Hazard
Identification.  Both types of data have advantages and disadvantages for
use in quantitative risk assessment.

3.3.1  Epidemioloqic Studies

     Epidemiology may be defined as the study of the relationships between
the frequency and distribution of disease(s) in human populations and the
factor(s) that may influence these diseases.  For example, an epidemiologic
cohort study may compare disease incidence or mortality within a group
(cohort) of persons exposed to an agent to that of a control group not
                                    3-9

-------
exposed to the agent.  Another example is the case-control  study.
Case-control studies are those in which the lifestyles  and  exposures  of a
group of persons having a disease (e.g.,  cancer)  are compared  to a control
group not having the disease.  Thus,  in a case-control  study,  similarities
or differences in past exposures are  identified and evaluated.
     The EPA, in the Guidelines for Carcinogen Risk Assessment (EPA,  1986b),
states that dose-response assessments based on adequate epidemiologic
studies are preferred over those based on animal  studies.   One reason is
that in epidemiologic studies, the effects are observed in  humans, and the
enormous uncertainty of extrapolation from animal  data  to humans is
eliminated.
     Epidemiologic studies may not, however, contain all of the quantitative
data necessary for a dose-response assessment.  For example,  past exposures
of cohorts or cases are usually difficult to determine, much  less quantify.
If the cohort was exposed to an agent in the workplace, there may be  no
quantitative measurements of the amount of the agent in the workplace air,
or there may not be records noting when various types of materials were
used.  Furthermore, even when an average cohort exposure is fairly reliable,
individual exposures often vary greatly.   If an individual  is exposed to an
agent, perhaps through a hobby such as gardening, it is unlikely that
quantitative estimates of exposure are available or that the exposure itself
would be documented.  Also, humans are exposed to a variety of substances
and have different lifestyles (e.g.,  with respect to diet,  smoking habits,
alcohol consumption), all of which may complicate interpretation of study
results.
     The size of the study group, the selection of a control group, and
ability to document disease/mortality cases also affect the validity of the
epidemiologic study.  When an epidemiologic study shows no increased
response, the statistical power to detect an  appropriate outcome  should be
included in the dose-response assessment  (EPA, 1986b).  Statistical power  is
the probability of detecting  an excess risk if it exists (Beaumont and
Breslow, 1981).  Thus, a high statistical power for a  study decreases  the
likelihood of false negative  results, but cannot completely rule  out the
                                    3-10

-------
possibility of effects occurring (Davis et al.,  1985).   Negative response
epidemiologic studies or studies which do not show carcinogenic effects
associated with given exposures, may serve to show an upper limit of risk.
     Controlling for the effects of smoking are  of particular importance for
studies attempting to establish a relationship between chemical exposure and
lung cancer.  An example of this importance is found in the EPA health
assessment document for acrylonitrile (EPA, 1983).
     In spite of all potential short-comings, well-conducted epidemiologic
studies do provide the most direct evidence linking exposure to carcinogenic
effects in humans.  Some of the criteria for evaluating the adequacy of
epidemiological studies are listed in Section 2.5.  NRC (1986) may be
consulted for a more detailed discussion on epidemiologic studies, their
use, and their limitations.

3.3.2  Animal Studies

     Animal studies or bioassays are widely used to help determine
carcinogenic potency of a chemical (see also Section 2.0, Hazard
Identification).  Animal studies have an advantage over epidemiologic
studies in that the exposures are always better  controlled and quantified,
animals are exposed only to the agent in question, and disease incidence
(tumor formation) may be more accurately determined (through necropsy and
pathology).  The EPA, National Cancer Institute/National Toxicology Program
(NCI/NTP), IARC, and other groups have prepared  recommendations for
designing animal studies including the use of (OSTP, 1985):

     0    two species of test animals (usually rats and mice of both sexes)
          tested at two, or preferably three, dose levels:  a high dose
          level (roughly the estimated maximum tolerated dose  [MTD]) and a
          lower dose level (roughly one-half the MTD) as determined in a
          90-day subchronic toxicity study;
     •    a route of exposure similar to the most likely human exposure;
     •    dosing and observation for toxic effects affecting their health
          for most of the animals' natural lifetime, usually 104 weeks for
          rodents (this should begin at 6 weeks of age);

                                    3-11

-------
     t    adequate numbers of animals (at least  50  per sex)  in  each  test
          group;
     t    adequate concurrent controls;
     t    detailed pathologic examination of tissues;  and
     •    appropriate statistical  evaluation of  results.

     In selecting animal data on which to base a dose-response  assessment,
the criteria listed above can serve as a guide for  identifying  a
well-conducted study.  The data set (study results) selected should  also
show a statistically significant increase in tumor  occurrence or multiple
tumor types and a statistically significant dose-response trend
(EPA, 1986b).  Early appearance of tumors in the treated  versus control
animals in an analysis that incorporated time-to-tumor data should also be
evaluated.  The data set which shows the greatest sensitivity should
generally be given greater emphasis because it is possible that human
sensitivity is as high or higher than the most sensitive  responding  animal
species (EPA, 1986b).  In counting tumors, the EPA  guidelines (1986b) state
that benign tumors should generally be combined  with malignant  tumors,
unless the benign tumors are not considered to have the potential to
progress to malignancies of the same histogenic  origin.
     There is some debate in the scientific community on  the use of data
from tests on certain animal species in preparing dose-response assessments
for carcinogens and the use of maximum tolerated dose in  bioassays.   A more
complete discussion of these issues is found in  OSTP,  1985.
     Some animal species have high background rates of spontaneous tumor
formation independent of the administration of a test agent.  Including
these tumors with those allegedly caused by exposure to a test  substance may
distort the estimate of the risk.   High rates of spontaneous tumor
generation increase the sensitivity of the analysis since the spontaneous
tumors are enhanced by the promoting actions of carcinogens given at high
doses.  For example, the B6C3F1 male mouse has a high background liver tumor
incidence and the Swiss-Webster female mouse has a high background  incidence
of mammary carcinoma.  Generally,  there is a consensus that a response above
background in B6C3F1 mouse liver,  in principle,  does have a significance in
                                    3-12

-------
terms of estimating human risk, but the distinction between "benign"  or
"hyperplastic" liver nodules and malignant neoplasms is still  not clear
(OSTP, 1985).  The International Expert Advisory Committee to  the Nutrition
Foundation emphasized the need for using scientific judgment on a
case-by-case basis in interpreting mouse liver bioassay results and the
relevance of additional toxicologic data (OSTP, 1985).  In the final  EPA
guidelines for carcinogen risk assessment, EPA takes the position that when
the only tumor response is in the mouse liver and when other conditions for
a classification of sufficient evidence in animal studies are  met, then the
mouse liver data should be considered as sufficient evidence of
carcinogenicity.  The EPA also states that the classification  could be
changed to a limited evidence category on a case-by-case basis (EPA,  1986b).

3.4  DOSE-RESPONSE ASSESSMENT TECHNIQUES

3.4.1  Low Dose Extrapolation Issues

     In the environment, people will generally be exposed to potential
carcinogens at much lower doses than are found either in epidemiologic
studies of workplace exposure or in experimental animal studies.  For
example, the doses used in a mouse experiment, included in EPA's risk
assessment of 1,3-butadiene, were 0, 625, and 1250 ppm, given 6 hours per
day, 5 days per week for a lifetime (EPA, 1985b).  It is highly unlikely
that long-term concentrations in the ambient environment would ever reach
those test levels.  Measured butadiene levels in synthetic rubber facilities
were typically below 1 ppm and nearly always below 20 ppm.
     Some scientists believe that the use of the maximum tolerated dose (as
described in bioassay protocols) leads to organ damage which may enhance
background tumor formation.  The relatively high doses may overwhelm the
cellular defense mechanisms which may normally provide some measure of
protection for the cell.  Also, high doses may alter the normal metabolic
actions of a cell, shifting from the normal, primary metabolic pathway to
one which may produce a metabolite that is actually carcinogenic.
                                    3-13

-------
     High doses in experimental  studies are used to overcome  the  inherent
low statistical sensitivity of bioassays (OSTP,  1985).   Most  bioassays  can
detect a cancer incidence of 10 to 15 percent or greater (over  background),
but cannot detect lower incidences (OSTP,  1985).  Potential problems  in the
use of high doses were discussed earlier.
     One other way to increase the sensitivity of bioassays is  to increase
the number of animals used.  One such study, which used 24,000  mice,  was
able to detect incidences of only 1 percent or greater but the  expense  of
conducting the study was considerable (OSTP, 1985).  It is unreasonable to
expect that larger-scale studies that can  detect increased incidences of
1 percent or less could be economically feasible to conduct.  This is of
concern because increased incidences of 0.01 to 0.0001 percent  (1 in 10,000
to 1 in 1,000,000) may be of concern in the human environment.   Thus,
considering the expense of conducting studies with large numbers of animals,
which do not always provide an useful increase in the ability to detect
disease incidence, it seems likely that use of high doses to  increase
sensitivity will continue.
     To account for the differences in dose levels used in animal studies
and those concentrations predicted to be found in the ambient environment,
the data set(s) selected for dose-response assessments must be used along
with mathematical models to extrapolate into the low dose range.  Several
currently used models are discussed below.

3.4.2  Mathematical Extrapolation Models for Animal Studies

     Several different mathematical models are available for low-dose
extrapolation of the dose-response curve.   This section of the report
discusses several mathematical models.  More detailed discussions of the
various extrapolation models may be found in Doll  (1971), Whittemore and
Keller (1978), Brown et al. (1978), Armitage and Doll (1961), and Park  and
Snee (1983).
     No single mathematical procedure is recognized as the most  appropriate
for low dose extrapolation in carcinogenesis (OSTP, 1985).  The  two general
types of low dose extrapolation models used in carcinogen risk assessment
                                    3-14

-------
are based on either tolerance-distribution or mechanistic assumptions,
although the same model may arise under different assumptions.  These can be
listed as follows:
    Tolerance-Distribution Models
     Probit (log-probit)
     Logit (log-logistic)
     Multi-hit (gamma-multi-hit)
     Wei bull
    Mechanistic Models
One-hit
Multistage
Multi-hit (gamma-multi-hit)
Wei bull
     Tolerance-distribution models assume that each member of a given
population has a threshold or tolerance level below which that individual
will not respond to the exposure in question and that the variability among
individuals can be expressed as a probability distribution (OSTP, 1985).
Models such as the probit, logit, gamma-multi-hit, and Wei bull can all be
generated by using different probability distributions (OSTP, 1985).
     The probit model assumes that sensitivities to a carcinogen among
individuals in a given population are log-normally distributed.  The form of
the model is:

     P(d) = $ (a + b log d)
     Where:    P(d) is the probability of response at dose d,
               

0 Where: P(d) is the probability of response at dose d, a is the intercept (background incidence), and b is the measure of potency of a test agent. 3-15


-------
Which, like the probit, is sigmoid and symmetric about  the  50  percent
response level, but approaches the extremes more slowly (Brown,,  1982).
     There is also a class of models that uses  the gamma function  to model
the tolerance-distribution.  The multi-hit model  is a member of  this class.
Thus, it is often referred to as the gamma-multi-hit model.  It  is discussed
under mechanistic models.
     The Wei bull model is  defined as:

     P(d) = 1 - exp - (bdk),  b,  k > 0
     Where:    P(d) is the probability of response at dose  d,
               b is the measure of potency of a test agent,  and
               k is the number of stages or events.

This model  also arises as  a mechanistic model from the  multi-hit model
applied to multiple target cells.
     The probit, logit, gamma, and Weibull distributions all have
potentially similar shapes between tumor frequencies of 2 percent  and
98 percent; hence, they often produce essentially identical  fits to the
observed data, but differ  widely at low doses (Park and Snee,  1983).
     A modification of a tolerance-distribution class of models  is the
Mantel-Bryan Method, which is based on a probit model.   This method was
proposed as a procedure for estimating the lower confidence limits for a
"virtually safe" level of exposure to a carcinogen.  (Virtually  safe was
                           - fi      -ft
defined as an additional 10"  to 10"  increase  in lifetime  cancer  risk.)
The Mantel-Bryan procedure uses experimental data to determine the highest
dose that yields no increased response and then calculates  the maximum risk
associated with that dose at the 99 percent confidence  level.   To
extrapolate to low doses,  it then assumes a slope of 1  per log dose.  Use of
this method in quantitative risk assessment has declined because  in the low
dose region it tends to produce relatively high estimates of "safe doses,"
compared to other procedures  (OSTP,  1985) and is thought to far overestimate
"true" risk.  This class of models is based on  a threshold hypothesis and
the models are nonlinear at low doses.  They have declined  in use with the
development of the hypothesis of a nonthreshold mechanism of action.
                                    3-16

-------
     The second class of models which attempts to describe the dose-response
curve in the low dose region is the mechanistic model.  This class of models
is based on the presumed mechanism(s) for carcinogenesis (OSTP, 1985).
Examples of these models are the one-hit, multi-hit, and multistage models,
each of which reflects the assumption that a tumor originates from a single
cell that has been damaged (OSTP, 1985).
     The one-hit model is the simplest of the mechanistic models and assumes
that a single "hit" or interaction of an agent within a cell will initiate
carcinogenesis.  The model was originally derived in relation to
radiation-induced carcinogenesis and a "hit" was defined in terms of a
quantum of radiation.  In chemical carcinogenesis, the agent is assumed to
interact with the DMA of a cell.  The model takes the form:

     P(d) = 1 - exp - (a + bd), a, b > 0
     Where:    P(d) is the probability of response at dose d,
               a is background incidence, and
               b is a measure of potency of a test agent.

At low doses, the form becomes P(d) » a + bd; the increase in cancer
frequency, bd, is directly proportional to dose.  Because the one-hit model
has only one parameter (other than background), it usually does not fit
experimental data well (OSTP, 1985).
     The multi-hit model, a threshold model, assumes that a target cell must
absorb at least "k" chemical  hits before a carcinogenic change is induced
(OSTP, 1985), and that the probability of a hit is proportional to dose
(NRC, 1980).  The model  is shown below:
     P(d) -I     r  (k)    dx

     Where:    P(d) is the probability of response at dose d,
               T(k) - (k-1)! for k > 1,
               b is a measure of potency of a test agent,
               k is the number of chemical "hits," and
               x is the expected number of "hits."
                                    3-17

-------
According to OSTP (1985), the multi-hit model  may produce conservative
estimates of "safe dose" levels compared with  several  other models and may
also indicate "safe dose" levels that are higher than  the levels which
actually produce deleterious effects.
     The multistage model, an extension of the one-hit model,  is the most
frequently used of all the low-dose extrapolation models and it reflects the
most prevalent current theory of carcinogenesis.  That is, a normal cell
must progress through a series of heritable changes or stages before it can
become malignant.  The extension of the one-hit model  is that the transition
rates of at least one of the stages is assumed to be dose related
(OSTP, 1985).  One version of the multistage model, developed by
Crump et al. (1977), forces a linear term in the estimation of upper
confidence limits.  This is the linearized multistage model frequently used
by EPA.  The Crump et al. version of the model takes the form:

     P(d) = 1 - exp [-(q0 + qjd + q2d2 + ... + qkdk)], k > 1

     Where:    P(d) is the probability of cancer at dose d,
               k is the number of stages, or k may also be assumed to be
               equal to the number of dose levels minus one,
               q^ are coefficients to be fit to the data, and
                i,
               d  is the applied dose raised to the kth power.

Each of the k terms is believed to be equivalent to a transition between
individual steps in a multistep pathway leading to an altered cell
(NRC, 1986).  The Crump et al. version of the multistage model  is  fairly
conservative in that it will always be linear in the low dose region, since
it forces an upper-limit of q, consistent with the data.
     The choice of model to use in a dose-response assessment is
controversial.  Different models predict different responses  (risk)  in  the
low dose region.  Even though these are "mechanistic" models, their
estimates are derived by curve-fitting and the relationship between  the
observed response at high dose levels versus the actual mechanisms involved
                                    3-18

-------
at low levels-remains one of conjecture.   Figure 3-3 shows  a plot  of
response (risk) versus dose of aflatoxin  for five dose response models.   In
this example, the slope of the dose-response curves for the Weibull,
multi-hit, and Mantel-Bryan procedure using the log-probit  models  are
steeper than those for the multistage and one hit models, even though the
same data set was used to construct the dose-response curve.
     Other, more complex models have been developed to enable incorporation
of more complex phenomena that could not  be modeled by simple distribution
models.  Time-to-tumor models attempt to  relate dose, tumor latency, and
cancer risk (OSTP, 1985).  A form of the  Weibull model in time (Pike) is an
example of a time-to-tumor model.  The Weibull model developed by  Pike
(1966) takes the form:

     P(t, d) - 1 - exp - [g(d)tk]
     Where:    P(t, d) is the probability of response at time, t,  and
               dose, d;
               g(d) is a function of dose; and
               ic is the number of stages  or events.

This model is Weibull in time, but can be other forms in dose.  Use of
time-to-tumor models is complicated by the fact that actual response times
are often difficult to determine in an experiment.  Some tumors may only be
seen as the animal is examined after it has died.  Research on a
hypothetical data base which did contain time-to-tumor information  showed
that low-dose risk predicted by time-to-tumor models differed by three
orders of magnitude from risk estimates based on other extrapolation
procedures (OSTP, 1985).  Time-to-tumor models may best serve as
enhancements for more common measures of risk such as lifetime probability
of tumors (OSTP, 1985).
     An additional class of models incorporate pharmacokinetic modeling to
predict the concentrations of parent compounds and metabolite(s) at the
reactive site(s).  Such modeling can be incorporated into either
tolerance-distribution or mechanistic models.
     As mentioned earlier, there is no single model which is most
appropriate for identifying "true" risk estimates.  EPA (1986b) noted that
in assessments conducted by the Agency, "in the absence of adequate

                                    3-19

-------
  P(d)
      10-*-
                 OH MS
              I
             10-'
       MH
 r
io-2
MB
            10*
                                                     Model
                                            OH-One Hit
                                            MS-Multistage
                                             W-Weibull
                                            MH-Multi-Hit
                                            MB - Mantel-Bryan (Log-Probit)
                     Source: Krewski and Van Ryzin, 1981
                                                                      S
                                                                      CD
Figure 3-3. Log-Log Plot of Risk,  P(d), vs. Dose, d, of Aflatoxin for
            Five Dose-Response Models
                                  3-20

-------
information to the contrary, the linearized multistage model  will  be
employed" and that a rationale will be included in the assessment  to justify
the model that is chosen.  EPA guidelines (1986b) state that  "when
longitudinal data on tumor development are available, time-to-tumor models
may be used."  The Agency further stated their intent to review the
biological and statistical evidence that indicate the suitability  of a
particular model, and to present results of various models for comparison to
results of the linearized multistage model, as appropriate.

3.4.3  Dose Conversions

     In addition to extrapolating the dose-response curve into the low dose
region, dose-response assessments based on animal studies must derive
equivalent human doses from the animal data.  Equivalent doses between
species are defined as those doses that will evoke equal responses.  If an
animal study was conducted for less than the animals' lifetime, then the
doses must be converted to equivalent lifetime doses.  Both of these
conversions are discussed in this section.
     Conversion between species is complicated by differences in humans and
laboratory animals regarding life span, body size, metabolism, route, and
duration of exposures (EPA, 1986a).  Usually, scaling factors are  used to
make the conversions.  Conversions to ambient exposures from epidemiological
study exposures usually require a scaling factor for duration of exposure.
This section describes the types of scaling factors used in both types of
studies.  A more detailed discussion of the scaling factors may be found in
EPA (1984b) or other EPA health assessment documents.
     Equivalent doses between species (animal to human dose conversions) may
                                                                 2
be expressed as mg/kg body weight/day, ppm in diet or water,  mg/m  surface
area per day, or mg/kg body weight/lifetime (EPA, 1986b).  The equivalent
                                                                          2
dose used by EPA, unless there is convincing data to the contrary, is mg/m
surface area/day (EPA, 1986b).  The reason for selecting the surface area
conversion is that certain pharmacological effects, namely metabolism,
commonly vary according to surface area (EPA, 1986b).  The comparison of an
effect between species is related or proportional to dose/body surface area
                                    3-21

-------
and body surface area is proportional  to an animal's  weight  to the
two-thirds power.  This proportion is  used in dose conversions because
weight can be determined much more easily than surface area.   Thus,
mg/weight '  /day is considered an equivalent dose between mammalian  species
in the absence of better information of pharmacokinetic differences  between
animals and humans.  For example, if a rat is exposed to 100 mg/day, then an
equivalent dose for a human for the same exposure would be:

     100/0.35 kg2/3 = X/70 kg2/3
     Where:    X    = equivalent human dose (mg)
               0.35 = weight of rat (kg)
               70   = weight of human (kg)
     Solving for X gives:
     100/0.49 = X/17
               X    - 3500 mg

     Often, experimental doses are given in the units other than mg/day;
these doses must then be converted to mg/day.  For a study in which test
animals ingested the test agent, conversions require data such as the amount
of food consumed, the concentration of the test agent in the  food,  and the
absorption fraction and an empirical "food factor" which is the fraction of
an organism's body weight consumed per day as food (EPA, 1984b).  The
absorption fraction is assumed to be 1 (assumed to be 100 percent absorbed),
unless data to the contrary are  available.  Experimental data may be
available which show that the chemical of concern may not be  completely
(100 percent) absorbed.  For example, a study may show that only half of the
chemical ingested is actually absorbed and the remainder is excreted.  For
                                                                    2/3
experimental exposures via inhalation, the equivalent exposure (mg/w ' ) can
be derived from the exposure concentration and exposure duration, the
relationship between breathing rates and body weight, and absorption
fractions (EPA, 1986b).
     In addition to dose conversions, the derivation of exposures must
sometimes be converted to equivalent lifetime exposures.  For example, the
test animals may have only been  dosed 2 days/week, 6 hours/day for  3/4 of
                                    3-22

-------
their lifetime.  If the duration of the experiment  (Le)  is  less  than  the
natural lifespan of the animal (L), then the slope  of the dose-response
curve is multiplied by a factor of (L/Le) .   This conversion  accounts for
less than lifetime exposure of the test animals and the  chance that tumors
occurring at later ages would be undetected  in less than lifetime  studies.
It is assumed that the age-specific rate of  cancer  will  continue to increase
as a constant function of the background rate, if dose remains constant
(EPA, 1984b).  The age-specific rates for humans increase by  at  least the
second power of age, and often higher powers.  Other exposure time
conversions would be used if, in an epidemiologic study  in  the workplace,
persons were exposed 6 hours/day, 5 days/week for half their  expected
lifetime.  An example of an equivalent dose  and equivalent  exposure duration
calculation is shown below.

Example:  Rats were exposed via inhalation to 350 ug agent  X/m   in
          particulate form for 7 hours/day,  5 days/week for 78 weeks.

The equivalent lifetime exposure for rats (expected lifetime  of  110 weeks
for this species) is:

     350 ug/m3 x 7/24 hours x 5/7 days x 78/110 weeks =• 51.7  ug/m3

The equivalent human exposure is calculated  by:

     d = i W1/3 vr

     Where:    d - equivalent exposure is ug/W '
               i - inhalation rate/body weight; for rats i  »  0.64  (or
                   0.22 m3/0.35 kg), for humans i = 0.29 (or  20  m3/70 kg)
               W = weight; for rats 0.35 kg, for humans 70kg
               v » concentration of agent X  in air, 350 ug/m ; equivalent
                   lifetime =51.7 ug/m
               r - absorption fraction, assumed to  be 1  and equal  in
                   both species, unless data that suggest otherwise  are
                   available
                                    3-23

-------
     Then:  - iW1/3 vr(rat) - iW1/3 vr(human)  or

               (0.64)(0.35)1/3 (51.7)(1)  - (0.29)(70)1/3
Solving for v gives an equivalent lifetime human  continuous  exposure of
       3
20 ug/m  (annual average).

Other examples of dose conversions may be found in  appropriate  chapters of
EPA health assessment documents.
3.4.4  Modeling of Animal Studies Using the Linearized Multistage Model

     Dose-response assessments for carcinogens relate the response
(probability or risk of cancer) to exposure of a given dose.   Extrapolation
models attempt to predict what the response (risk or probability of cancer)
is in the low dose region of the dose-response curve.  The output of an
extrapolation model, then, is an estimate of the probability of a response
(risk) or probability of cancer related to low dose.
     Results of the linearized multistage model will be discussed in this
report because the EPA guidelines (1986b) state that the Agency will use
that model in dose-response assessments unless data are available which
indicate other models should be used.  The presentation of model output is
taken directly from EPA  (1986b).
     As shown earlier, the linearized multistage model has the form:

     P(d) = 1 - exp [-(qo + qjd + q2d2 + ... + qkdk)]

     The point estimate of the coefficients q., i =0, 1, 2, ..., k, and
consequently, the extra risk function, P*(d) or risk above the background
level, at any given dose d, is calculated by maximizing the likelihood
function of the data.  When all of the higher order terms in the multistage
model are zero, except for the linear term, the multistage model reduces to
the one-hit model.  The model, specifically the curve-fitting methodology,
is discussed by Andersen et al (1983).
                                    3-24

-------
     The point estimate and the 95 percent upper confidence limit  of the
extra risk, P*(d), (extra risk assumes that tumors induced by the  agent
occur independently of spontaneous tumors) are calculated by using the
computer program GLOBAL82, developed by Crump and Watson (EPA,  1984b).  At
low doses, upper 95 percent confidence limits on the extra risk and lower
95 percent confidence limits on the dose producing a given risk are
determined from a 95 percent upper confidence limit, qj, on slope  parameter
q,.  Whenever q, > 0, at low doses the extra risk, Pt(d), has approximately
the form Pt(d) - q, x d.  Therefore, q| x d is a 95 percent upper  confidence
limit on the extra risk.  R/qJ is a 95 percent lower confidence limit on  the
dose producing an extra risk of R.  In fitting the dose-response model, the
number of terms in the polynomial is chosen equal to (h-1), where  h is  the
number of dose groups in the experiment, including the control  group.  Let
LQ be the maximum value of the log-likelihood function.  The upper-limit,
q?, is calculated by increasing q, to a value q? such that when the
log-likelihood is remaximized subject to this fixed value qf for the linear
coefficient, the resulting maximum value of the log-likelihood I,  satisfies
the equation:

     2 (LQ - Lj) - 2.70554

     Where:    2.70554 is the cumulative 90 percent point of the chi-square
               distribution with one degree of freedom, which corresponds to
               a 95 percent upper limit (one-sided).

This approach of computing the upper confidence limit for the extra risk
Pt(d) is an improvement on the Crump et al (1977) model.  The upper
confidence limit for the extra risk calculated at low doses is always
linear.  This is conceptually consistent with the linear nonthreshold
concept discussed earlier.  The slope, q|, is taken as an upper bound of the
potency of the chemical in inducing cancer at low doses.
     Whenever the multistage model does not fit the data sufficiently well,
data at the highest dose are deleted and the model is refit to the rest of
the data.  This is continued until an acceptable fit to the data is
obtained.  To determine whether or not a fit is acceptable, the chi-square
statistic.
                                    3-25

-------
     X* -  £  (X. - N.P.)2
                1    1 1
              H1P1 (1 - V
is calculated where:
          N. - number of animals in the ith dose group,
          X. - number of animals in the ith group with  a tumor response,
          P. - probability of response in the ith group estimated  by
               fitting the multistage model to the data, and
          h  - number of remaining groups.

The fit is predetermined to be unacceptable whenever chi-squared is larger
than the cumulative 99 percent point of the chi-square  distribution with  f
degrees of freedom, where f equals the number of dose groups minus the
number of non-zero multistage coefficients.
     Animal extrapolation estimate upper limit incremental  unit risks are
the maximum plausible risks associated with one "unit"  of exposure.  For
example, if q? - 1.1  x 10   (mg/kg/day)  ,  this means that not more than
                                                     3
1.1 cancer cases would be observed per every 1000 (10 ) persons exposed for
70 years to 1 ug/m  of the agent in question.  An extrapolation model will
                                                     2/3
predict the risk associated with a given dose, d mg/kg  ' /day.  Then, by
ratio (since the model forces the slope of the dose-response curve to be
                                        3
linear), the risk associated with 1 ug/m  can be calculated.  The standard
conversions of i, W ' , and v must be used and were discussed earlier in
Section 3.4.3.
     In addition to the unit risk, the dose-response assessment can yield an
estimate of carcinogenic potency, based on the unit risk.  To estimate
potency, the unit risk slope factor for a given chemical is multiplied by
the molecular weight of a chemical and the resulting number is expressed in
terms of (mmol/kg/day)"1 (EPA, 1984b).  That value is called the relative
potency index.  Suppose that the upper-bound estimate of potency (slope)  of
a chemical is 9.9 x 10"  (mg/kg/day)   and the molecular weight of the
chemical is 92.5.  Then the potency index would be 9.9  x 10    (mg/kg/day)
x 92.5, or 9.2 x 10"  .  The EPA's Carcinogen Assessment Group  (CAG)  has
                                    3-26

-------
calculated potency indices for many chemicals they have evaluated.   The
various potency indices can be used to compare strength or weakness  of
carcinogenicity among chemicals.
     The computer program of the linearized multistage model  also can
provide estimates of the maximum likelihood estimate of risk.   Maximum
likelihood is a method of finding good estimates of parameters in models.
If the data are normally distributed, the method of maximum likelihood is
essentially the method of least squares.
     An example of the difference in maximum likelihood estimates and
95 percent upper confidence limits generated by four different models is
shown in Table 3-1 (EPA, 1985d).  The largest difference in the two types  of
risk estimates is seen in those predicted by the multistage model.  Maximum
likelihood estimates are extremely sensitive to the data; 95 percent upper
confidence limit estimates are much more stable (NRC, 1986).  Consequently,
EPA does not encourage the use of maximum likelihood estimates of risk from
animal data, owing to their statistical instability.
     Currently, there is no established procedure for making "most likely"
or "best" estimates of risk within the range of uncertainty defined by the
upper and lower limit estimates (EPA, 1986b).  Such an estimate may be most
feasible when human data are available and exposures are in the dose range
of the data (EPA, 1986b).
     In some cases, epidemiologic studies can be used to provide an estimate
of the upper bound of risk, when used in conjunction with risk estimates
from animal studies.  If an animal study shows a statistically significant
increase in the number of tumors or tumor types and a well-designed and
well-conducted epidemiologic study shows no such statistically significant
evidence, then the risk estimate from the epidemiologic study may indicate
an approximation of the upper limit of risk.

3.4.5  Modeling of Epidemioloqic Studies

     Epidemiologic studies can generate data which can be used to derive
quantitative estimates of cancer risk.  If there is reason to believe that
the carcinogen acts in a manner to produce a response that is multiplicative
                                    3-27

-------
O >- LU
   z a
>-  u.
z I-H u-
o z •-<
   LU a
Q 3=
LU O Q£
00    3
oo
   OU.

      i:
   LU O
      a:
O    >
H- OO ft
   (—Q£
^ <£ LU
OO OC Q

OC LU >-
   —i a
UJ  00
I— O Ol
OO LU .-H
LU DC	
00
u


M •
04 *Q
1 O
to X
2




_4
fH ~4
*i
i*






•H F-l
*? -5

5 x





9
U -4
•» V
•r* "6
1*

w


O -4
u •

a x
0
-j








3 «
ft o





«J
f "
O



D
to
+J fl
•J O
_l X



*-N
en
6
to
^
il
I>
O
O
en CM fH «
i i i i
0000



en fH CM fH

o
fH oo  00 
fH
Si


ourc<
Vi
                                                3-28

-------
to the background rate, then the cancer experience is reported as relative
risk (NRC, 1986).  The measures of relative risk most frequently used are
the Standardized Mortality Ratio (SMR) and the Standardized Incidence Ratio
(SIR) where:

     SMR » observed deaths/expected deaths x 100
     SIR = observed incidence/expected incidence x 100
     Where:    observed deaths/incidence are those seen in the study
               population and expected deaths/incidence are determined for a
               similar population with the same age distribution, but
               without the chemical exposure.

Therefore, an SMR or SIR of 100 shows no difference in risk between that
which is expected and that which was observed in the study.
     If there is reason to believe that a carcinogen acts in such a manner
as to produce a response that is additive to the background rate, then the
cancer experience is reported as attributable risk.  Attributable risk is
defined as the rate of disease (or mortality) in exposed individuals that
can be attributed to the exposure.  In general, the attributable risk
measure is used only for cohort studies since it is necessary to know the
person-years of experience of both the exposed and control groups.  (For an
additional use in case-control studies, see MacMahon and Pugh, 1970.)  The
attributable risk (AR) is defined as:

     AR - observed cancers (exposed) - observed cancers (control)
            person-years (exposed)       person-years (control)

Both the SMRs (or SIRs) and ARs are used to derive quantitative estimates of
risk.  SMRs (or SIRs) are used in relative risk models and ARs are used in
additive or excess risk models.  These are described in more mathematical
terms below.
     The excess additive risk model follows the assumption that the excess
cause-age-specific death rate [hj(t)] due to exposure to a given chemical is
increased in an additive way by an amount proportional to the cumulative
exposure to the chemical up to that age.
                                    3-29

-------
     Or:   hj(t)  = AXt

     Where:     Xt - cumulative  exposure  up to age t and
              A  • proportional  increase.


     Then, the total  cause-age-specific  rate h(t) is the sum of the
background cause-specific rate,  hQ(t), and h,(t):


     h(t) = h0(t) + hj(t)


The parameter A can be estimated by summing the  expected death rates:
     Where:    E.  = total number of expected cases in the observation
                J    period for the group exposed to cumulative exposure X..

               EQ. = expected number of cases due to background causes
                 J   (usually derived from county, State,  or national  death
                     rates, corresponding to the same age  distribution of
                     the cohort).

               X.  = cumulative exposure for the jth exposure group.

               W.  = the number of person-years of observation for the jth
                J    exposure group.

                A m slope of the dose-response model.


To estimate A, the observed number of cause-specific deaths, 0., is

substituted for E-.  When there is only one exposure group, the estimate of
                 J
0. is assumed to be distributed as a Poisson variable with expected value E.
 J                                                                         J
solution proceeds via the method of maximum likelihood (EPA, 1985d).   Thus,

the slope,  ^ , becomes (Oexposed - °control^XW and the est1mate for tne
lifetime incremental risk is 70 x  ^ .

     The multiplicative or relative risk model follows the assumption that

the background cause-age-specific death rate at any time is increased by an

amount proportional to the cumulative dose up to that time.  The model takes

the form:
                                    3-30

-------
     h(t) - h0(t) x (1 + AXt)

The terms in the equation are defined exactly as are those for the additive
model .
     To estimate A (the slope of the dose-response model), the observed and
expected mortality experience is summed:
where the terms are defined as for the additive model.
     Solution again proceeds via the method of maximum likelihood, with the
maximum likelihood estimates, ^ ,

     N             O.X.
     L  [-EQ,X. +   J J  3 = 0
    j=l    OJ J   1 +  X..

When there is only one exposure group, the estimate of the slope is:

     *  - Obi - 1 / X - SMR - 1 / X
     A    Exp

     Lifetime, incremental risk estimates using this model are obtained by
multiplying ^ by the background lifetime risk, designated by PQ, and
obtained from period vital statistics by lifetable methodology.  Using
United States cancer death rates, occurring between 1973-1977, the
background risk of death from lung cancer is 0.038 or 38 deaths per
1000 people.  Other cancers have lower background risks such as bladder
cancer (0.005).
     The multiplicative or relative risk model assumes that the
time-response relationship is constant.  Thus, at any time since the start
of exposure (after a latency period), the Standard Mortality Ratio for a set
cumulative exposure is constant.  Likewise, in the additive model, the
excess mortality rate for a set cumulative exposure is constant over time.
                                    3-31

-------
Thus, under either model, excess risk (either SMR or mortality rate) should
remain constant once exposure stops.  Modification of these models
incorporating such variables as age, time of first exposure, and latency
period have been developed to incorporate additional information.  For more
information on these models, see EPA, 1985a.
                                    3-32

-------
                          4.0  EXPOSURE ASSESSMENT

     The third step in the risk assessment process is  the  exposure
assessment.  Since dose-response assessment is  the primary focus  of this
report, this discussion of exposure assessment  is  much less detailed than
the discussion of dose-response assessment.  A  brief description  is included
to help readers place exposure assessment in the context of risk  assessment
rather than to explore extensively exposure assessment methodologies.
     Contact between a pollutant and a human population is called "exposure"
and is measured by the number of people exposed to specific concentrations
of a pollutant for a given time period.  An exposure assessment is  the
determination or estimation (qualitative or quantitative)  of the  magnitude,
frequency, duration, and route of exposure.  For exposure  to carcinogens,
continuous exposure over a lifetime is usually  assumed.  Exposure estimates
can be coupled with cancer potency data to estimate the potential risk from
exposure to a carcinogen.
     The EPA Guidelines for Estimating Exposures outline an exposure
assessment in terms of the following five main  topics:  sources,  exposure
pathways, measured or estimated concentrations  and duration, exposed
populations, and integrated exposure analysis.   The guidelines also point
out that each exposure assessment must be tailored to  meet the needs of the
problem at hand (EPA, 1986d).  There are several procedures for estimating
exposure and there is no universally accepted minimum set of specifications
for estimating exposure (OSTP, 1985).
     Under EPA's suggested outline of five main topics, the first main area
is the sources of the substance under study.  Sources  include all points
from which the substance is believed to enter the  atmosphere, including
production, distribution, use, and disposal sources.  The pathways that need
to be considered will vary depending on the chemical characteristics of the
pollutant, the source of the pollutant, and the land use pattern in the
vicinity of the source.  For example, an analysis  of a waste-to-energy
                                    4-1

-------
facility in an agricultural  region might include  modeling  of ambient  air
concentrations of emissions  as well  as disposition  modeling  of water,  soil,
and plant concentrations.
     The second topic, exposure pathways and environmental  fate,  examines
how a substance moves from the source to the people exposed.  The necessary
level of detail may vary,  but such an analysis  may  look at transport  of the
substance through the environment as well  as potential  physical  or chemical
transformation.  In other words,  an understanding of the environmental
behavior of the substance is important in an exposure assessment
(EPA, 1986d).
     Measured or estimated concentrations of releases and environmental
concentrations of the substance are among the main  components of an exposure
assessment.  If actual measurements are not available,  concentrations can  be
estimated by various means such as fate models  or by analogy to known
substances.  Environmental concentrations are generally estimated from
measurements, mathematical models, or a combination of the two.  The EPA
guidelines note that if environmental measurements  are not limited by sample
size or inaccuracies, then exposure assessments based on measurements have
precedence over estimates based on models.  The guidelines also point out
that concentrations must be estimated and presented in a format consistent
with available dose-response information.  In some  cases, an annual average
concentration estimate will  be sufficient while,  in other cases, the
temporal distribution of concentrations may be required (EPA, 1986d).
     The estimate of the number of people exposed to various concentrations
is the next main part of an exposure assessment.   By analyzing the
distribution of the agent, populations and subpopulations that are
potentially subject to a significant exposure can be identified.  This will
form the basis for the populations studied.  Census and other survey data
can be used to quantify and describe the population exposed.  In  some  cases,
more specific  information may be warranted such as information on potential
exposure of sensitive subpopulations  (such as pregnant women, children, and
the chronically ill) or of nonhuman populations  (EPA,  1986d).
     The final step in an exposure assessment is to combine the  estimates of
environmental concentrations with the description of the exposed
populations.  Specifically, data  include the size of the exposed

                                    4-2

-------
populations; the duration, frequency,  and intensity of exposure;  and the
routes of exposure.  The results of exposure calculations should  be in a
format consistent with the requirements of the dose-response functions used
in a risk assessment.  For example, when lifetime risks are considered,
average daily exposure over a lifetime is usually calculated (EPA, 1986d).
     In many exposure assessments for toxic air pollutants, EPA uses the
Human Exposure Model (HEM) to quantify the number of people exposed to air
pollutants emitted by stationary sources.  The HEM consists of an
atmospheric dispersion model, including meteorological data; population
distribution data; and a procedure for estimating risks due to the predicted
exposure.  The model uses census data for population estimates and an
atmospheric dispersion model for estimates of ambient concentrations at
160 receptor sites surrounding a point source up to 50 km away.  The model
matches population estimates with concentration estimates, calculating:
(1) total or aggregate exposure, that is, the summation of the population
exposed times the concentration across all concentrations, and (2) the
population exposed or the number of people exposed to a particular
concentration or higher concentrations.  The HEM uses the assumption that
people are exposed to a particular ambient concentration continuously for a
70-year lifetime.  Table 4-1 presents an example of HEM output for an
exposure assessment of ethylene dichloride (EDC) from 18 sources
(Kellam, 1986).  Results from HEM can be combined with EPA's unit risk
factors to estimate cancer risks both as maximum lifetime risks and annual
incidence (population risk) (EPA, 1986a).
     The National Air Toxics Information Clearinghouse (NATICH) data base
contains information on selected EPA risk analysis results calculated using
HEM.  These emissions and risk estimates are developed by EPA in  support of
decisions concerning possible regulation under Section 112 of the Clean Air
Act.  The estimates are made for specific facilities emitting particular
chemicals under study by EPA (NATICH, 1986b).  Table 4-2 shows an example of
the NATICH risk information.
     The EPA's Office of Pesticides and Toxic Substances has developed  two
related exposure modeling systems.  The Graphical Exposure Modeling System
(GEMS) is an interactive system being developed for integrated exposure
                                    4-3

-------
                                      .fi  J3
                                      U   U
                                      ^  ^4
                                      M   U
                                      T3  Tj
                                      o   o
                                      o   o
                                      OO
                                                                           co         ci   *H            -»

                                               iNiHOiiOr-tN            vOrHO^OtCOtOOO
                                               cnOOcn*Hi-lfHC4OC>4OOr*-iHO

                                               OOOOOONNOOOOOOO
    LU
LU
                         &

                        £
                                                         oo
                                                         oo
                                                         oo
                                                    oo
                                                    oo
                                                    oo
                                                            o
                                                            o
                                                            o
o
o
o
o
o
o

o
o
o
    o
    vo
LU CM
o:

=3 LU
00 O
O
f\  v/

X 00
LU l—l
      S
      M

      S
      V

      1
      o
Q- o:
oo:
I-S^
*-* -4  n
x  > -i

x^*
    O
    a
^ K
    O
LU LU


OQ >-
< a:
l— <
    00
                         |

                        O4
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO


 I    t    I     I    I    I     I    (     I    I    I     I    I     I    I    I     <    t








"*^IN<^CO^I»H^»«H»OrH^H**«*r<'«-ICQCO











iHOO«H^«HrHfHtHpH^r-ItOr^iHO   »HO
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO


+   +   +   +   I   +   +    +   +   •»-    +   +    +   +   +    +   +   +


f*1   M   M   H   f*T   M   W    1*1   f'1   r*1    f*1   M    M   M   M    f*1   f*1   M


oiiHOicn^atoojtH^moitootfnaitor*


ODNio
-------

















<
LftJ


LU
1— 1—
(J Z
LLJ «C
1 ^^
(^•j r^
LU 3
t/> — J
_l
JirO
O O-
LU >-
^
CO Z
< ^2
< 2
°s
Z O
O LL.
Z CO
H-4
Z «/>

QC —1

LU 
U
u
  • H en 1 1 en •1 M 0 a o M tH & t ladorf * 9 u M Z en i 1 CM « CO o en 0 o r* *H CM to O CO •ff tO en CM o o o o o m o 1 M to o 1 u m m CM gi • M O 4J M IH 5 Landing n i ^ 2 ° X m i t en CM CM r* o n o -* rH o tn O* O Ot O O ,-1 . . . . . i •H 0 IO CO Ol -4 H en in CM m *ti H m o •« . CM »4 CM o in co o 1 CM CM CM CM CM A O 0 O O O -4 •§ 0 «H CM iH ?-4 «H U O CM O O O O O O O O B « O O 0 O O O « O O O O 0 «J M v So r. •» « r« • -i "t * °! *"! "I o Si1 •0 4 U p. : § CM i-l O iH CM • V tt U 0 JO I ! i •* "5 •i *> • T) 3 5 S 3 S •* U Jj 0 II on, o • v *» «J M M Maun* a 3 fe M • to fe M V « •eg. So. S • -S e O -.40 B SB M J > Q. S 0-4 3 O X M 5 MO C 4J -4 DM -44 B fl M ^4 M -4 M • "*4 JS W 4 U 3 « W 3 1 "3 ° " S .s s§ is J 1 .• ; 1 o -i a. 3 -4 -4 «
    -------
    analyses.  This system can model  releases in air,  surface water,  ground
    water, soil, and multimedia releases.   It contains fate and exposure models,
    environmental characteristics data, chemical fate  data, population data,  and
    release source data (OPTS, 1986).
         Part of GEMS, the Graphical  Atmospheric Modeling Subsystem (GAMS)
    allows multiple atmospheric dispersion models to be used for multiple
    release sources to examine overlapping exposures.   Point and area source
    models are used in GAMS to estimate annual average atmospheric
    concentrations.  The GAMS model integrates the atmospheric concentration
    estimates from both models with a population distribution data base in order
    to estimate exposure and risk (OPTS, 1985).
         The OSTP considers human exposure assessment to be the weak link in
    environmental health studies (OSTP, 1985).  Many of the OSTP concerns are
    also addressed in the EPA guidelines (EPA,  1986d).  Some of the issues
    leading to this uncertainty include:
    
         •    The path a chemical follows from  its source to the exposed  target
              can be quite complex and  involve  different environmental media.
         t    There is no universally accepted  minimum set of  specifications for
              the reliable estimate of  exposure.
         •    Exposure assessment requires extrapolation from  a limited number
              of sites to a large population.
         0    Exposure assessments are  often  unable to reflect all of  the
              parameters important to determining health effects  (e.g., peak
              versus average  exposure).
    
    Characterization of this  uncertainty is discussed  in Section  5.0.
                                         4-6
    

    -------
                             5.0  RISK CHARACTERIZATION
    
         Risk characterization is the final  step in risk assessment,  in  which
    information from hazard identification,  dose-response assessment,  and
    exposure assessment are integrated.  Two types of information are  presented
    in risk characterization for a risk assessment.  The first piece  of
    information is a numerical estimate of risk and the second is a framework
    which helps judge the significance of risk (EPA, 1986b).   The framework
    should include weight of evidence information and a description of the
    uncertainties in the risk assessment (qualitative and quantitative).  The
    EPA guidelines (EPA, 1986b) address this framework.  This section  of the
    report discusses various ways in which a numerical  estimate of risk  can be
    presented and describes the ways in which uncertainties in the various
    components of a risk assessment can be characterized.
    
    5.1  PRESENTATION OF NUMERICAL ESTIMATES OF RISK
    
         Three basic types of numerical estimates of cancer risk can  be
    presented in risk characterization:  a unit risk, a dose "corresponding to  a
    given level of risk, and individual or population risks (EPA, 1986b).   A
    unit risk is the excess lifetime risk due to a continuous, constant  lifetime
    exposure of one unit of concentration (EPA, 1986b).  The unit risk can be
    expressed in terms of ppm in diet, mg/kg/day or, most frequently  in  risk
    assessments for air pollutants, micrograms per cubic meter (ug/m  ) in the
    air.  The unit risk approach is based on the assumption that the
    dose-response curve is linear at low doses (see also Section 3.0,
    Dose-Response Assessment).  It is usually expressed as a two-digit number
    times a power of ten such as 5.5 x 10   (ug/m )" .
         If different dose-response extrapolation models are used, then  risk may
    best be presented as the dose which is associated with a given level of
    risk.  For example, if the one-hit model, a linearized multistage model, and
    a Weibull model were all used to extrapolate the dose-response curve,  each
                                        5-1
    

    -------
    model would probably predict different doses  that  would  be  associated  with  a
    given level of risk such as 1 x 10"  (one case  in  one  million  exposed
    persons).
         Similarly, the National Academy of Science used different extrapolation
    models (and different animal to human extrapolation methods)  for predicting
    the expected number of cancer cases in a general population exposed  to
    0.12 g/day of saccharin.  The modeling results  showed  a  range  of between
    0.001 cases/million people exposed to 5200 cases/million people exposed
    (EPA, 1984a).  While some alternative statistical  model  extrapolation
    approaches are of value to a risk manager, in fact, the  range  of risks
    described by using these approaches has little  biological  significance
    unless available evidence of cancer mechanisms  can be  used to  support  the
    selection of one model over another.  In the  interest  of consistency of
    approach and for the purpose of identifying an  upper bound estimate  on the
    potential cancer risk, EPA recommends the use of the linearized multistage
    model rather than presenting a range of estimates  from various models
    unless, on a case-by-case basis, there is reason to do otherwise.
         Finally, risks may be reported in terms  of risk for an individual or
    risk for an exposed population.  These presentations are used frequently by
    EPA in studies during the development of national  emission standards for
    hazardous air pollutants (NESHAPs), where a unit risk factor is multiplied
    by an exposure estimate to obtain maximum individual risk or aggregate risk.
    An example of the different methods of reporting risks is shown in the
    sample HEM output in Section 4.0.  In the example  table, the maximum
    individual risk is the risk for the person living  in the area of highest
    ambient air concentrations.  It is determined by multiplying the unit risk
    factor for the specific chemical of concern by the highest exposure estimate
    in the area under examination.  Thus, if the unit  risk factor for a chemical
             -53-1                                             3
    is 4 x 10   (ug/m )   for a continuous lifetime exposure to 1 ug/m  and the
    highest predicted exposure concentration  is 3 ug/m  , then the maximum
    individual lifetime risk would be  4 x 10   x 3 or  1.2 x 10.  Aggregate
    risk, on the other hand, applies to all people within the given  area  of
    analysis.  It  is expressed as expected incidences of cancer among all  people
    in the analysis after 70 years of  exposure.  Frequently, the  incidence is
    divided by 70  to obtain an incidence per year.  An  example is  shown below.
    
                                        5-2
    

    -------
    2 ua/m
    4 x 10"5
    (ug/m3)'1
    8 x 10'5*
    1,000
    0.08
    1 uq/m
    4 x 10'5
    (ug/m3)'1
    4 x 10"5
    10,000
    0.4
    0.5 ua/m
    4 x 10'5
    (ug/m3)'1
    2 x 10"5
    100,000
    2.0
                                                                -5       3-1
         Example:  The unit risk factor for chemical  X is  4 x 10   (ug/m )   .
    The exposure assessment showed ambient air concentrations of 2  ug/m ,
    1 ug/m3, and 0.5 ug/m  and exposed populations of 1,000, 10,000,  and
    100,000, respectively.  Then the probability (risk)  of cancer would be  as
    follows for the three exposure concentrations:
    Unit Risk
    
    Probability of Cancer
    Number of Persons
    Exposed
    After 70 Years of
    Exposure (Population
    Risk or Aggregate Risk)
    Total Aggregate Risk = 2.5
    *
     Eight cases per 100,000 people exposed.
    
    Thus, the aggregate risk is 2.5 or, expressed as annual incidence,
    2.5/70 = 0.04.
    
         Some risk assessments are concerned with population exposures to
    multiple chemicals.  In these cases, the numerical estimates of risk for
    each chemical may be added together, unless there is toxicological evidence
    to the contrary (EPA, 1986b).  More specific information on risk assessments
    for chemical mixtures is found in the EPA Guidelines for the Health Risk
    Assessment of Chemical Mixtures (EPA, 1986c).
    
    5.2  PRESENTATION OF THE UNCERTAINTIES IN RISK ASSESSMENT
    
         Uncertainties are inherent in risk assessments.  Even though steps are
    taken throughout hazard identification, dose-response assessment, and
    exposure assessment to reduce the uncertainties, some will still remain in
    the final risk assessment.  The remaining uncertainties need to be described
    
                                        5-3
    

    -------
    quantitatively (if possible)  and qualitatively  to  provide  as much
    information as possible for risk managers  to  use in decision-making.  At the
    present time, there is no method that  can  be  used  to  provide an overall
    quantitative expression of the uncertainties  in a  risk  assessment.
    Therefore, uncertainties are discussed as  they  occur  in each segment  of a
    risk assessment.   The types of uncertainties  associated with the first three
    components of the risk assessment process  (hazard  identification,
    dose-response assessment, and exposure assessment) are  discussed in this
    section and methods of describing the  uncertainties are shown.
         In hazard identification, a major concern  is  the nature of  evidence
    that a substance is indeed a human carcinogen.  For risk managers  to  be  able
    to use the results of a risk assessment,  some indication of the  belief that
    a substance is a human carcinogen must be shown.   The EPA has  devised a
    weight of evidence scheme, similar to  that of IARC for  use in  describing  the
    likelihood of a substance being a human carcinogen (EPA, 1986b).   The system
    is described in detail in Section 2.0  of this report.  The letter  or
    letter/number classification of a possible carcinogen should  be  included in
    EPA risk assessments when the numerical estimate  of risk is presented.   For
    example, if the unit risk of a substance is 5 x 10   (ug/m )    and the
    weight of evidence for carcinogenicity is B2 (sufficient animal
    evidence/inadequate or no human evidence), then in risk characterization,
    the risk estimate should be presented  as 5 x 10   (ug/m )" [B2].   Note that
    in risk characterization, no judgments are made or presented  about possible
    decisions using the risk estimate.  That is, the  societal value  (or economic
    or political implications) possibly associated with the risk estimate is not
    part of risk assessment.  Those types  of decisions or judgments  are made as
    part of risk management.  The weight of evidence  notation gives  more
    information to risk managers about the strength of the evidence  (i.e., the
    likelihood) for the substance in fact  being a carcinogen in humans.
         As was shown in Section 3.0, several presumptions are made  in preparing
    a dose-response assessment.  Some uncertainty is  associated with these
    presumptions and with the extrapolation models used.   Most often,
    statistical approaches are used to express the uncertainties  associated with
    dose-response assessment data.  First, data sets  which show a statistically
                                        5-4
    

    -------
    significant increase in tumors in specific organs or tissues should be used
    in the dose-response assessment.  Negative data sets may also be used.  The
    appropriate statistical analysis should include at least a statistical te-st
    for trend (EPA, 1986b).  Second, the extrapolation model(s) used contributes
    to uncertainties in the numerical risk estimate.  The linearized multistage
    procedure, used most frequently by EPA (Section 3.0), leads to an upper
    bound of risk, because the model has a feature which estimates the largest
    possible linear slope of the dose-response curve (the 95 percent confidence
    limit of the data) that fits the data in the experiment (EPA, 1984b).  Thus,
    the unit risk factor is a plausible bound estimate of the risk.  With such
    an estimate, the true risk is not likely to be higher than the estimate, but
    could be lower (EPA, 1984b).
         In summary, there are steps in the dose-response assessment process
    which generate uncertainties in the numerical risk estimates.  In order to
    provide a risk manager with the most information possible, the uncertainties
    should be described as fully as possible in risk characterization.
         Exposure assessments also generate uncertainties because they are based
    on simulation models, measurements, and assumptions about input parameters
    for exposure modeling.  Table 5-1 summarizes the primary methods of
    qualitatively and quantitatively characterizing uncertainty  in exposure
    estimates (EPA, 1986d).  The qualitative methods may include discussions of
    the limitations of a sampling program for measuring actual exposures  such as
    analytical sensitivities and collection efficiencies for sampling equipment.
    Discussions of the validity of a given model, and the assumptions made in
    selecting model input, are examples of a qualitative statement of the
    uncertainties for an exposure assessment based on modeling.
         Quantitative expressions of uncertainties include  statistical
    descriptions such as confidence intervals.  More detailed discussions of
    these methods are given in EPA (1986d) Guidelines for Exposure Assessment.
    
    5.3  PRESENTATION OF THE ASSUMPTIONS USED IN RISK ASSESSMENT
    
         As can be seen from the discussions on each of the preceding components
    of risk assessment, assumptions and scientific judgments must be made in
    almost every step to allow the risk assessment to proceed.   In risk
    
                                        5-5
    

    -------
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    ca
    H^
    M
    N^
    QC
    UJ
    L^
    O
    • OO
    QC UJ
    ^^
    •—i o
    QC U.
    QL
    >•
    U. t—
    oz
    «— 4
    >- «c
    QC t—
    
    VI
    B
    -4
    VI
    M
    «
    1
    a
    N
    »4
    VI
    il
    y
    4
    J
    U
    VI
    o
    44
    
    VI
    Tl
    0
    J3
    VI
    £
    ><
    M
    1
    'E
    o.
    
    
    
    
    
    
    c
    v<
    VI
    n
    ^4
    VI
    V
    VI
    u
    a
    V
    g
    X
    0
    I
    V
    4
    _
    :
    a
    c
    &4
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    n
    •o
    |
    V
    •H
    S
    VI
    «4
    VI
    *
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    n
    
    •u
    s
    itatl
    -4
    1
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    •O
    «
    VI
    g
    -3
    4J
    0)
    W
    1?
    t)
    (4
    
    i
    
    
    
    
    
    
    4
    ij
    4
    Q
    
    *M
    0
    «J
    fl
    t»
    4J
    x
    M
    
    1
    I
    H
    
    •)
    V
    
    44 3
    . 8-
    01 a
    ti
    3 44
    vi O
    o
    a, v
    Sf -!
    u n-
    Measured '
    large sam|
    fnembers.
    
    
    s s
    - 1
    OB -3
    5. v vi
    ft • i
    01.0 •
    s ? t
    ""JS 6
    4J «
    <*4 X **
    •*< s 5
    44
    O 44 T) «
    •* II 0
    n u C
    3 vT.3 T>
    •gt 3 A
    §13 8
    o i o. u
    . .
    M i-l
    
    
    
    X
    «
    I
    3
    •t
    £
    vi
    44
    0
    S
    o
    •4
    JJ
    4J
    1
    _J.
    
    «H
    
    
    JS
    VI
    44
    O
    «l
    U
    «
    VI
    !
    i
    
    
    4
    
    (fl
    
    
    
    
    
    el
    
    hi
    O
    44
    «
    •
    14
    3
    «
    I
    s?
    t)
    •fl
    2
    3
    i
    
    
    i 8
    r 3
    « 0 B
    • g-:
    § •-
    s s ?
    a 
    41 *) * 4
    J3 II n ^
    U S-43
    •9 « v>
    h o •O n
    o o O o
    44 o e a
    
    oi
    
    
    
    
    
    vi
    B
    V
    |
    n
    4
    §
    H
    II
    V II
    •O u
    
    
    
    ^
    V
    *-4
    *4
    VI
    B
    » «
    § g
    U 8.
    S •
    -4
    U H
    VI O
    V)
    -4 B
    •a 3
    • 1
    2 B
    3 -
    «l •
    &:
    2 -^
    
    
    
    
    
    »4
    *J
    4
    ~4
    3
    §•
    a
    
    44
    o
    III
    l-l
    g,
    n n
    h
    -4 V
    -4 J>
    g]
    « i
    n
    « O •
    2 TU 5
    1 - s 2 44 a
    •3 334 OB
    U Q, 44 -4 U
    3J e fa 3 §5
    4J O OK -4-4
    -4 -4 U -4 O U 4
    4 44 iJ O VI 0i 3
    £°^ "5 B 3g
    » « -4 U -4 • h
    VI V 14 -4 14 II VI X*
    Bi-4U 44W.O H V
    •H -4 VI VI *4 n
    tl -1 44 -1 v -OH
    g g' °* 5 *•"
    SOU w o> .2 ««
    •OV3 Slox 3 3 "i
    -I a «1 B4B B«-<
    44 0 -5-44 5 0 01
    Bna on u p. -o
    ooSe; 04<<4 «i X o
    (J44«l O > -4 UVB
    
    r4 « m
    
    
    
    X
    « II
    !> h
    L u 3
    3 B vi
    « « 0
    Jll 1
    U 3
    n •>
    44 4 A
    0 I "
    • - 44
    B -O n o
    ° * 1 *
    *J 6* *J
    4 a -4 -! •
    u « e TJ ^
    -4 »4 5 -4 •
    B » O -I 73
    •3 • II 40
    j -o u > B
    .
     -4 «
    .
    rt CM
    
    
    M
    O U
    a 3
    M 4 O. •
    3 VI B X
    •1 4 -4 B
    0 Tl 0
    & .53
    5 "5
    • M -4
    £ 44 0 M
    VI O 44 VI
    VI
    44 •) » -4
    O B -4 -O
    O n
    x -4 4 e
    vi vi .a *H
    -i • <• -a
    •o ^ u u 4
    .4 « -4 « -4
    -i -o s JS u
    4 O 3 iJ 4
    > 8 J o >
    
    r4 CM
    
    
    
    
    II
    h
    3
    n
    O
    &
    II
    •8
    g
    x4
    U
    g
    J
    «4
    14
    VI
    VI
    ~4
    O
    
    
    
    44
    0
    
    
    C *
    o n
    -4 41
    *J r-l
    J-3
    -4 *4
    M VI
    VI 4
    J >
    •O VI
    3
    •s&
    VI -4
    It
    vi -3
    " 5
    u i
    X
    « g
    > x -3
    -4 El VI 4
    vi « a u
    "S3 " 3 v, S
    c £ 2^5 ? |
    0 VI 4 II VI 5 3
    -4 1-4 O W
    4J 4 4V 4 44 V
    s P e LI u o -H
    J C 4 O O -4 A
    »4O •en44VIB-4
    14 COM
    VI13 V*Tt4w4«
    v> V -4 • « 3 «J O
    -4 n .0 M u qr « a
    •O 4 4 • 0 N
    U3 *4 «J 01 - -4 V
    T) M ^- -1 ~ U .O
    41 V 4 --* w II
    J3 VI II U V) O O
    vi ^ vi vi o rt B
    o « 3 "4 4 a w
    *J D. T3 O>&VIUl«X
    niKO B<343.£4
    w oi a M -i T) a o s
    
    M T-t
    
    
    
    
    II
    4 U
    vi 3
    4 n
    •a o
    8 *
    5 •
    44 5
    O vi
    S44
    0 °
    vi &
    4 -4 .
    VI Tl -^
    -4 -1 V
    5-4 -a
    4 0
    J > S
    
    T-* f»*
    
    «
    B
    « O
    Ml ^
    B VI
    25
    1^
    4 w
    •H
    fl"0
    JS
    X «
    1 °
    1 g-
    - II
    
    I "
    S J=
    a "
    -4 44
    Z 0
    
    
    VI
    3
    a
    fl
    »4
    
    ^
    V
    •o
    g
    VI
    o
    44
    4
    VI
    4
    •O «
    «
    •O M
    01 J3
    U 4
    *4 *4
    35
    
    
    »
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    T)
    >O
    00
    O»
    rH
    
    <
    a.
    u
    Source :
    5-6
    

    -------
    characterization, the assumptions should be identified and their effect on
    the numerical risk estimate described if possible.   Such discussions enhance
    the framework with which to help judge the significance of the risk.
         Examples of the types of assumptions and judgments which should be
    presented and discussed include choice of data sets and extrapolation model,
    choice of model(s) used in the exposure assessment, and any pharmacokinetic
    or metabolic activities which could influence a numerical risk estimate.
                                        5-7
    

    -------
                                6.0  RISK MANAGEMENT
    
         Risk management is the decision-making process in which some action is
    taken or policy formed concerning a potential  risk to the environment and/or
    to human health.  Risk management differs from risk assessment in that
    management of risk usually considers political, economic, and social  issues
    in the decision-making process.  Products of a risk assessment,  such  as
    numerical estimates of risk for an exposed population, are used  by risk
    managers in deciding, for example, whether or not, or to what extent  and at
    what cost, a source of toxic pollutants should be controlled.  Risk
    management may also be considered as a method of setting priorities among
    possible actions for various pollutants or sources.  Management  of risk does
    not always deal with decisions on numerical estimates of human health risk
    or quantifiable estimates of risk.  For example, the value of wilderness
    areas is not easily quantified, and yet decisions may have to be made on
    whether or not to "preserve" such areas.
         Different groups or agencies may choose different tools to manage risk
    in different situations.  For example, a risk-benefit analysis may be
    conducted in which the economic benefits of using a certain chemical
    (e.g., increased crop yield) are balanced against the associated risks to
    human health or the environment (EPA, 1984a).  Additionally, a benefit/cost
    analysis, which weighs the cost of control against the monetized benefits of
    control, could be performed.  Such an approach may work best when all the
    factors affected by the decision can be expressed in terms of dollars
    (EPA, 1984a).  This type of analysis is often difficult for pollution
    control agencies to carry out because of the controversy involved with
    placing dollar values on a human life.  However, a cost-effectiveness
    analysis neither expresses monetary benefits nor weighs risks against such
    benefits (EPA, 1984a).  A cost-effectiveness analysis identifies the
    least-cost method for obtaining a stated goal.  This technique is the most
    frequently used risk management tool at EPA (EPA, 1984a).
                                        6-1
    

    -------
         Independent of the type of risk management tool  used,  risk managers
    should be aware of the underlying assumptions and inherent  sources  of
    uncertainty contained in a risk assessment.   It is important to consider the
    fact that numerical presentations of risk are probabilities, and usually
    upper bound risk estimates and not absolute  values for numbers of cancer
    cases or deaths.  Also, each step of the risk assessment process, hazard
    identification, dose-response assessment, and exposure assessment,  contain
    assumptions which allow the risk assessment  to proceed,  but which must be
    understood by the risk manager in making decisions.   For example, it is
    assumed that toxic effects observed in test  animals  (when properly
    qualified) are applicable to humans (NRC, 1977).   But there may be  some
    cases in which animal models do not respond  the same way as humans, due to
    metabolic or species differences.  In a dose-response assessment, the point
    estimates of risk determined by a mathematical extrapolation model  may
    actually be greater than or less than the true risk.   Finally, the  estimates
    of the magnitude, frequency, and duration of exposures used in an exposure
    assessment may not be consistent with each and every type of exposure that
    can occur for a given chemical.
         The risk management process must take into account that risk assessment
    is a continually evolving science that is very dependent on the situation to
    which it is applied.  New data are constantly being generated that can
    assist in decreasing the uncertainty associated with the assumptions that
    are made in risk assessment.  In most cases, if data are lacking,
    assumptions are selected that are "health-conservative."  Such stacking of
    worst case and conservative assumptions will generally overestimate the true
    risk.  The goal of a risk assessment should be to present the most accurate
    estimate of risk possible.  Risk management should encourage the application
    of new and better information and assumptions.
         In spite of the uncertainties, properly conducted quantitative risk
    assessments are valuable tools for risk managers.  They provide  an estimate
    of the probability of the risk to human health.  The  importance  of properly
    estimating and describing uncertainties in a risk assessment is  made clear
    when the uses of risk assessments by risk managers is considered.
                                        6-2
    

    -------
                              7.0   RESOURCE REQUIREMENTS
    
          Conducting  a  quantitative risk  assessment requires different types of
     personnel  capabilities  and  some specialized computer software.  This section
     of the report  describes the types  of skills needed and defines the types of
     equipment  needed to  conduct a  quantitative risk assessment.
          As was  shown  earlier in the report,  a risk assessment  includes
     information  in health sciences (e.g., toxicology, epidemiology,
     biostatistics) and exposure modeling (e.g., air dispersion  modeling, ground
     water modeling).  Therefore, staff capability  in each of these areas is
     needed. A pollution control agency  may  need to expand the  existing staff to
     add these  capabilities, with the added expense of salaries.  Also, because
     the field  of risk  assessment can change  quickly, staff skills must be
     updated through  additional  training. One alternative to expanding the staff
    .is to rely on  assistance from  EPA  Regional Office personnel.  Expert
     modelers and toxicologists  in  EPA  Regional Offices may be consulted on a
     variety of risk  assessment  projects. Another  alternative to expansion of
     staff is to  have the work done by  an outside group, such as consulting
     companies  or interstate agencies.  An advantage to developing in-house staff
     is that the  personnel resources will be  available in the future.  Advantages
     of using outside resources  include the fact that computer equipment would
     not have to  be acquired by  the agency and agency time would not be
     concentrated in  conducting  the risk  assessment.
          The computer  equipment needed would include copies of  the extrapolation
     models for a dose-response  assessment (such as GLOBAL 83) and any
     atmospheric  dispersion  models  or ground  water models for exposure
     assessments.   Also,  access  to  a computer capable of running the models would
     be needed.   These  needs are dependent on the actual types of analysis to be
     done.
          One possible  method an agency could use to quantitatively define risk
     for a given  exposure scenario  would  be to use  existing risk assessments
     developed  by EPA or  other agencies.   In  such cases, a unit  cancer  risk
                                         7-1
    

    -------
    factor may already have been calculated.  Then the agency would need only to
    conduct an exposure assessment and risk characterization to combine the
    exposure and dose-response (unit risk) data.   To conduct a risk assessment
    in this manner would require exposure modeling staff and personnel familiar
    enough with the risk assessment process to apply results of previously
    conducted dose-response assessments.  An example of this case would be one
    in which a new facility were to locate in a given region and have the
    potential to emit a carcinogen for which a unit risk factor had been
    developed.  The agency could conduct exposure modeling, perhaps using the
    Human Exposure Model (HEM) and then combine the results of HEM with the
    appropriate unit risk factor.  HEM automatically computes maximum individual
    risks and/or aggregate risks.  HEM inputs include latitude/longitude of the
    source and stack parameters.  The user's manual for HEM may be consulted for
    more details about this model (EPA, 1986a).
                                        7-2
    

    -------
                                       PART 2
    
         The sections in this part of the report present four examples of how
    State and local agencies have used risk assessment in their air toxics work.
    The example risk assessments were performed by the Northeast States for
    Coordinated Air Use Management (NESCAUM) (Section 8.0), the States of
    California (Section 9.0) and Michigan (Section 10.0), and the local air
    pollution control division of Clark County (Las Vegas), Nevada
    (Section 11.0).
         Each agency has taken a somewhat different approach to risk assessment,
    often due to the agency's objective for using the risk assessment results.
    Many of the assumptions used are agency-specific and may not necessarily be
    endorsed by EPA.  Similarly, while work by all of the agencies is
    characterized as risk assessment, not all the agencies have undertaken the
    four-step process described in Part 1 of this report and in the EPA risk
    assessment guidelines.
         Each section in Part 2 addresses the agency's objectives for
    undertaking risk assessment, an overview of the methodology used, and the
    use of the results.  Each section also addresses topics designed to help
    other State and local agency staff who may be deciding how risk assessment
    could be done in their agency.  These topics include resource requirements
    and advantages and disadvantages of the particular approach as seen by the
    agency that used it.
    

    -------
             8.0  NORTHEAST STATES FOR COORDINATED AIR USE MANAGEMENT -
                       RISK ASSESSMENT FOR TETRACHLOROETHYLENE
    
    8.1  OBJECTIVES IN UNDERTAKING RISK ASSESSMENT
    
         In March 1985, the Directors of the Northeast States for Coordinated
    Air Use Management (NESCAUM) requested that NESCAUM begin to coordinate
    assessments of specific toxic air pollutants.  Since a comprehensive health
    assessment for a toxic air pollutant can be a long and complex process, the
    NESCAUM States (Connecticut, Massachusetts, Maine, New Hampshire, New
    Jersey, New York, Rhode Island, and Vermont) joined together to share their
    expertise.  The long term objective of this process is to begin development
    of ambient standards for toxic air pollutants.  In May 1985,
    tetrachloroethylene was chosen as the first toxic pollutant to undergo this
    risk assessment process (NATICH, 1985).
    
    8.2  OVERVIEW OF METHODOLOGY USED
    
         After selecting tetrachloroethylene as the pollutant for study, the
    NESCAUM member States divided the assessment work among the States and the
    EPA Region I and NESCAUM toxics coordinators.  General background
    information on tetrachloroethylene was assembled including physical and
    chemical properties, analytical methods and limits of detection, production,
    use, emissions, and environmental fate in air, water, and soil.  Data on
    ecosystem considerations were also gathered, including aquatic toxicity and
    bioconcentration and bioaccumulation.  Literature describing exposure via
    air, drinking water, and food was reviewed as was literature on
    toxicokinetics.  In addition, references describing health effects including
    acute, subchronic, noncarcinogenic chronic effects as well as fetotoxicity,
    teratogenicity, reproductive effects, genetic toxicity, and carcinogenicity
    were reviewed.
                                        8-1
    

    -------
         NESCAUM's health evaluation for tetrachloroethylene  included  risk
    assessments for both noncarcinogenic toxicity  and  carcinogenicity.   The
    noncarcinogenic assessment resulted in an  ambient  air  exposure  standard  for
    chronic noncarcinogenic effects.  The cancer risk  assessment  resulted in an
    estimate of the average daily ambient level  associated with an  one in one
    million (1 x 10" ) lifetime excess cancer  risk in  humans.
    
    8.2.1  Hazard Identification
    
         NESCAUM reviewed literature on both epidemiologic studies, animal
    bioassays, mutagenicity, and reproductive  and  developmental  toxicity as well
    as information on physical and chemical properties and routes of exposure
    before the NESCAUM Air Toxics Committee decided to classify
    tetrachloroethylene as a probable human carcinogen.
         The NESCAUM committee referenced the  results  of 12 epidemiologic
    studies involving exposure to tetrachloroethylene  in dry cleaner workers and
    in metal workers.  The committee concluded that in the studies done to date,
    it is difficult to separate the effects of confounding factors because the
    studies involved mixed exposures to petroleum and  other solvents and,  in
    some cases, to metals, and because the effects due to smoking are not clear.
    The committee felt that the epidemiologic evidence to date supports an
    assessment of carcinogenic potential for tetrachloroethylene, but that this
    remains to be defined since many confounders and possible sources of bias
    exist (NESCAUM, 1986).
         Results from five animal bioassays were reviewed.  Two of these
    bioassays, one based on exposure via gavage and the other on inhalation,
    provided evidence that tetrachloroethylene exposure resulted in a
    carcinogenic response in the rodents tested.  These bioassays were conducted
    by the National Cancer Institute (NCI) and the National Toxicology Program
    (NTP).  The NTP bioassay corroborated the NCI finding of liver tumors in
    mice and also demonstrated that tetrachloroethylene was carcinogenic via the
    inhalation route and that it was carcinogenic in more than one species  at
    more than one site.  The other  three assays did not show positive evidence.
    One of the three assays was not a sensitive indicator of carcinogenicity,
                                        8-2
    

    -------
    another used only a 12-month exposure period rather than the rodent lifetime
    and used dose levels that may not have been high enough to provide maximum
    sensitivity.  The third was based on skin painting and it has been
    hypothesized that the skin does not have the necessary enzymes to covert
    tetrachloroethylene to an active metabolite (NESCAUM,  1986).
         According to EPA's classification system for weight of evidence of
    carcinogenicity, sufficient animal evidence was present and this evidence
    constitutes consideration of a compound as a probable  human carcinogen.  The
    NESCAUM committee concurred with this classification.
    
    8.2.2  Dose-Response Assessment
    
         The NESCAUM committee used data from a 1985 inhalation bioassay
    performed by the NTP for low-dose extrapolation.  In the NTP test, male and
    female rats and mice were exposed to tetrachloroethylene for 6 hours per
    day, 5 days per week, for 103 weeks.  The rats were exposed to 0, 200, or
    400 ppm tetrachloroethylene, and the mice were exposed to 0, 100, and
    200 ppm.  In male mice, the incidence of hepatocellular carcinomas
    (malignant tumors of the liver) was significantly increased at both dose
    levels.  The incidence of hepatocellular adenomas (benign liver tumors) in
    male mice increased at the higher doses.  Female mice had increased
    incidence of hepatocellular carcinomas at both dose levels.  Renal tubular
    cell karyomegaly was also observed in both species of treated mice.  In male
    and female rats, exposure to tetrachloroethylene was associated with
    statistically significant increases in mononuclear cell leukemias.  It also
    produced renal tubular cell karyomegaly in male and female rats, renal
    tubular cell hyperplasia in male rats, and increased squamous metaplasia in
    the nasal cavities of male rats.
         From this NTP study, the male and female mice tumor data were used for
    low-dose extrapolation which was performed by New York using the Global 82
    model.   The Global 82 program uses a linearized multistage model of
    carcinogenesis for low-dose extrapolation from animal  carcinogenicity data
    (see Section 3.0).  NESCAUM noted that this model is "reasonably
    conservative."  The risk estimates made with this model should be regarded
                                        8-3
    

    -------
    as representing a plausible upper limit for the  risk.   In  other  words,  the
    true risk is not likely to be higher than the estimate,  but  it could  be
    lower (NESCAUM, 1986).
         Using the Global 82 model  and the mice tumor data from  the  NTP study,
    four dose-response curves were constructed for hepatocellular carcinoma in
    male mice, hepatocellular adenoma or carcinoma in male mice,  hepatocellular
    carcinoma in female mice, and hepatocellular adenoma or carcinoma in  female
    mice.  The chi-square test was applied to determine if the model provided a
    reasonable fit to the experimental data in the observable  range, and  the fit
    was found to be acceptable (NESCAUM, 1986).
         The linearized multistage model (Global 82) provided  an estimate of the
    95 percent lower confidence level of the average daily dose  associated with
    a lifetime excess cancer risk in experimental animals of 1 x 10"  lifetime.
    These estimates were extrapolated to humans using a conversion  factor based
    on dose per unit surface area.  The NESCAUM committee considered both dose
    per unit body weight and dose per unit surface area as interspecies scaling
    factors.  The dose per unit body weight is based on the assumption that
    organ weight, and hence, organ dose are better correlated with body weight
    than surface area.  The  surface area relationship is based on the
    proportionality between  heat production and body surface area.   As weight
    increases in warm-blooded animals, the basal heat production per unit body
    weight decreases.  In other words, the smaller the animal, the  faster its
    basal metabolic rate  (NESCAUM, 1986).
         The National Academy of Sciences has noted that compounds  are generally
    distributed more slowly  and tend to persist longer in larger mammals than  in
    smaller mammals (NRC, 1977).  A 1985 EPA report concluded that  chlorinated
    hydrocarbons persist longer in larger mammals and that, based on pulmonary
    excretion data, tetrachloroethylene may persist longer than any other
    similar hydrocarbon.  The same EPA study noted that tissue half-lives of
    tetrachloroethylene appear to follow a surface area relationship
    (EPA, 1985c).  Another study that compared animal bioassay results with
    human epidemiologic data concluded that either the dose per unit body weight
    or the dose per unit surface area may be appropriate.  The authors added
                                        8-4
    

    -------
    that projections based on dose per unit body weight  always  generated  the
    lower estimate of human cancer risk and,  in some cases,  appeared  to
    underestimate the observed risk.
         Taking these studies into consideration, the NESCAUM committee decided
    to use the dose per unit surface area approach to interspecies  conversion
    because this approach is more conservative in the protection of public
    health.
         Specifically, animal doses were converted to human  doses using the
    following assumptions:
    
         •    body surface area can be expressed as a function  of body weight
              raised to the 2/3 power, and
         t    the average human weighs 70 kg and inhales 20  m  air per day.
    
    Using these assumptions, NESCAUM calculated the human exposure level
    associated with a one-in-one million lifetime excess cancer risk using
    various assumptions about the percent tetrachloroethylene metabolized in
    mice and humans.
         NESCAUM pointed out that it used what are typically regarded as
    conservative assumptions.  The committee explained that  the reason for the
    conservative approach stems both from the responsibility of the States to
    protect public health and from the lack of adequate data to support any but
    those assumptions most protective of public health.   Other less conservative
    assumptions, such as normalizing dose to body weight rather than surface
    area or assuming a lower percentage of the exposure dose is metabolized,
    would result in lower unit risk values than those estimated by NESCAUM
    (NESCAUM, 1986).
         The exposure levels associated with a risk of one-in-one million of an
    additional cancer death over a 70-year period ranged from 0.01 ug/m  to
    0.1 ug/m , depending on the assumptions made about percent metabolism.  The
    absorption factor used was the same for human and rodents and was assumed to
    be at least 70 percent and as high as 100 percent.  Conversion of these
    human exposure levels to unit risk factors (i.e., the upper bound estimate
    of the additional probability that excess cancer risk will  result from
                                        8-5
    

    -------
    continuous lifetime inhalation exposure to 1  ug/m  for  a  70-year  lifetime)
    determines unit risk factors ranging from 1 x 10    to 1 x 10
    (NESCAUM, 1986).
         During the NESCAUM peer review process,  one  point  raised  was whether
    100 percent metabolism was a fair estimate of the true  dose  a  human  would
    receive.  After reviewing available data, the Committee concluded that for
    exposure to low concentrations, at least 70 percent of  the ambient
    tetrachloroethylene would be metabolized and  possibly as  much  as
    100 percent.  Thus, ranges of unit cancer risk factors  associated with these
    levels of metabolism were presented (NESCAUM, 1986).
    
    8.2.3  Exposure Assessment and Risk Characterization
    
         The goals of the NESCAUM committee were  to estimate  an  acceptable
    ambient air concentration protective against  adverse noncancerous health
    effects and to calculate a unit cancer risk factor for  tetrachloroethylene,
    and thus, the NESCAUM work was completed after the dose-response assessment.
    Since this report discusses the carcinogenic  risk assessment process,
    NESCAUM's derivative of an air concentration  protective against: noncancerous
    adverse health effects is not included.  The  NESCAUM member  States are using
    the results of the tetrachloroethylene study  to formulate control options
    for dry cleaners.  New York, New Jersey, and  Connecticut  are in the process
    of conducting exposure assessments.
    
    8.3  RESOURCE REQUIREMENTS
    
         Several academic disciplines were important to the NESCAUM air toxics
    committee, including toxicology, inhalation toxicology, statistics,
    epidemiology, molecular biology, physiology,  and molecular physiology.   In
    its work on tetrachloroethylene, NESCAUM found that molecular physiology was
    important because of the need to understand the metabolism of the compound.
         Development of the unit cancer risk factor for tetrachloroethylene  was
    done by a team of ten people from the NESCAUM States,  the EPA regional
    office, and the NESCAUM staff.  Each team member used an average of about
                                        8-6
    

    -------
    60 hours for research and analytical work, bringing the total  to 600 hours
    plus additional time for team meetings.  In addition,  the NESCAUM staff
    member spent about one-half person year on the project.  Special resources
    devoted to the project included a personal computer and the GLOBAL 82
    multistage model software.
    
    8.4  OTHER RISK ASSESSMENT WORK
    
         Similar to the tetrachloroethylene project,  NESCAUM will  soon publish
    results of a study on trichloroethylene and has begun  a study of gasoline
    vapors.
    
    8.5  NESCAUM'S ADVICE TO OTHER AGENCIES
    
         In evaluating their approach, NESCAUM reported two suggestions for
    other agencies.  The first was that, although a team of ten people
    strengthened the final product, it was difficult for such a large group to
    work on this type of project.  The second suggestion was the importance of
    using toxicity information that has been peer reviewed.  It was their
    experience that industry sometimes submits toxicity information that has
    never been published or peer reviewed.
         For additional information on NESCAUM's risk assessment work, readers
    can contact Margaret Round, NESCAUM Toxics Coordinator, at (617) 367-8540.
                                        8-7
    

    -------
    

    -------
                    9.0  CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES
    
    9.1  OBJECTIVES IN UNDERTAKING RISK ASSESSMENT
    
         According to legislation passed in September 1983,  the California Air
    Resources Board (CARB) must identify and control toxic air contaminants.
    The CARB begins the regulatory process by requesting the California
    Department of Health Services (CDHS) to evaluate the health effects of and
    to conduct a risk assessment for a candidate chemical or a class of
    chemicals.  The CARB simultaneously carries out an exposure assessment.  The
    CARB and CDHS assessments are reviewed by a Scientific Review Panel.  If the
    Panel finds that the joint report is scientifically adequate, CARB publishes
    a report summarizing the findings with respect to whether the substance in
    question should be designated as a toxic air contaminant, and, if so,
    whether a safe threshold exposure level exists (NATICH,  1984).  Where
    applicable, the risk assessment will provide an estimate of the added
    lifetime cancer risk (CARB, CDHS, April 1985).  If CARB declares the
    substance a toxic air contaminant, then the results of the risk assessment
    are used in risk management decisions regarding recommended control
    measures.
    
    9.2  OVERVIEW OF METHODOLOGY USED
    
         Section 9.0 is based on the "Guidelines of Chemical Carcinogen Risk
    Assessments and Their Scientific Rationale," published by the California
    Department of Health Services in November 1985 (CDHS, 1985), and on the risk
    assessment for ethylene dibromide published in April 1985 (CARB,
    CDHS, 1985).  The guidelines were published by CDHS to clarify internal
    procedures their staff usually uses in dealing with certain scientific
    decision points characteristic of most risk assessments.  The CDHS chose to
    publish this information in the form of flexible nonregulatory guidelines
    because the "scientific underpinnings of carcinogen risk assessment are
    changing too quickly to attempt placing guidelines into law or regulation"
    (CDHS,  1985).
                                        9-1
    

    -------
    9.2.1  Hazard Identification
    
    
         In general, CDHS uses the same criteria for evaluating the weight of
    
    evidence of carcinogenicity as does the International  Agency for Research on
    
    Cancer (IARC).  Specifically,  CDHS uses the following  ten guidelines for
    carcinogen identification (CDHS,  1985):
    
    
         1.   Short-term tests can provide supportive evidence for
              carcinogenicity, but will not be considered  by themselves as
              sufficient evidence.
    
         2.   Chemicals that have  been shown to have sufficient evidence for
              carcinogenicity in test animals will  be considered as potential
              human carcinogens.
    
         3.   Sufficient evidence  for carcinogenicity in animals and sufficient
              evidence for potential  human carcinogenicity can be demonstrated
              by positive evidence for carcinogenicity from properly conducted
              bioassays in two species of animals or two separate bioassays,
              preferably by different routes in the same species.  The doses
              used should be the maximum tolerated dose (MTD) and some fraction
              thereof.
    
         4.   In animal bioassays, there must be a statistically significant
              increase in the incidence of malignant tumors or a decrease in the
              time to development of malignant tumors to constitute sufficient
              evidence.  In general,  benign tumor causation augments the
              evidence for carcinogenicity provided by malignant neoplasms.
    
         5.   When there is conflicting evidence in several animal bioassays,
              the positive and negative results should be weighted by the
              adequacy of the study design, the appropriateness of the species
              tested, the pharmacokinetics of the species, and the statistical
              power of the test.  As a risk assessment policy, when choosing
              between equally weighted evidence, positive evidence will be
              chosen over negative evidence.
    
         6.   Assays for mutagenicity and the DNA adduct formation are
              considered neither sufficiently reliable nor well enough
              understood to influence the decision to list the substance  as  a
              carcinogen, but such information can be used as supportive
              evidence.  The same is true for the distinction between an
              initiator and a promoter.  In other words, the distinction  between
              so called "genetic" and "epigenetic" carcinogens has no
              implication for a chemical being listed as a carcinogen.
                                        9-2
    

    -------
          7.  Properly conducted epidemiological studies (this excludes
              so-called "ecological studies" in which individual exposure status
              is not recorded) can provide sufficient evidence to warrant
              listing as a carcinogen.  Unless sufficient evidence from
              bioassays also exists, more than one positive epidemiological
              study will usually be needed to warrant listing or regulatory
              control.
    
          8.  A properly conducted epidemiological study with sufficiently long
              follow-up, adequate exposure information, and sufficient
              statistical power to rule out all but de minimus regulatory risk
              could be used to declare a substance as not conveying significant
              risk of human carcinogenesis.  Such a substance would not be
              listed as a carcinogen.  It should be noted, however, that no
              study or group of studies to date has had these properties.  Thus,
              for practical purposes, epidemiology can be used to "rule in" a
              substance as a potential human carcinogen, but is unlikely to
              "rule it out."
    
          9.  When there is conflicting evidence between epidemiological
              studies, they should be weighted according to the adequacy of
              design, length of follow-up, adequacy of exposure information, and
              statistical power.  As a risk assessment policy, when considering
              positive and negative evidence of equal weight, the positive
              evidence should be chosen for listing the substance as a
              carcinogen.
    
         10.  Although minimum protocols and standards for the conduct of
              carcinogenicity studies can be specified, scientific judgment is
              still needed in the interpretation of results.
    
    
         In 1985, the CDHS accepted as its list of carcinogens the list of
    
    substances and processes considered by IARC to have sufficient evidence of
    
    carcinogenicity in humans and/or animals.  If and when the National
    Toxicology Program (NTP) institutes a similar classification system which
    
    rates the sufficiency of the total evidence pertaining to a chemical, CDHS
    
    will add chemicals listed by NTP as having sufficient evidence of
    
    carcinogenicity in animals and/or humans to the CDHS list.  If a substance
    
    not listed by NTP or IARC appears to be of sufficient concern in California,
    
    CDHS would request that it be reviewed by NTP or IARC.  If this cannot be
    
    done in a timely way, CDHS will use the ten guidelines listed above to
    
    determine if there is sufficient evidence to add the substance to the CDHS
    
    list of carcinogens.
                                        9-3
    

    -------
         Ethylene dlbromlde, the example discussed in Section 9.2.2,  is listed
    
    by IARC as having sufficient evidence of carcinogenicity in animals
    
    (IARC, 1982).
    
    
    9.2.2  Dose-Response Assessment
    
    
         In its guidelines for chemical  carcinogen risk assessments,  CDHS sought
    to develop a flexible dose-response assessment policy so that the Department
    
    would have an algorithm to distinguish between very high, low, and negligible
    
    risk; carry/ out calculations to determine whether a particular exposure is
    
    actionable; develop regulatory standards; and establish simple potency
    
    groupings to assist State agencies as they consider potency along with other
    
    factors in order to set their priorities.  To this end, the Department
    outlined the following 13 guidelines for dose-response assessment
    
    (CDHS, 1985):
    
    
         1.   Despite the imprecision of available methods, some attempts to
              estimate the magnitude of carcinogenic risks to populations are
              desirable to improve the basis for setting priorities and to
              improve the basis for decision making.
    
         2.   Both animal and human data, when available, should be part of the
              dose-response assessment and should be used as the basis for
              setting regulatory limits and determining the need for action.
    
         3.   Development of the comprehensive risk assessment for final
              regulatory review will be accompanied by an appropriate statement
              of the degrees of mathematical and biological uncertainty.
    
         4.   Since neither animal nor cellular biological experiments afford
              sufficient evidence of the existence or location of a carcinogenic
              threshold, the CDHS will use nonthreshold models.
    
         5.   The CDHS will generally follow the algorithm in Figure 9-1 for
              carrying out dose-response assessments based on animal bioassay
              data.  The Department will consider alternative approaches in the
              public comment period during peer review of each risk assessment.
    
         6.   At present, the basis for distinguishing between "genetic" and
              "epigenetic" carcinogens is not sufficiently secure to warrant
              separate approaches to dose-response assessment.
                                        9-4
    

    -------
                                         Animal
                                      Bioassay Data
        Data on
    Competing Causes
       of Death
                                           i
    Calculate Correction
     for Competing Cause
      of Death, if Data
       Available (Life
        Table Methods)
    Pharmacokinetic
         Data
                                           I
    Calculate Active Dose
      at Target Site(s),
      if Data Available
                                        Time-to-
                                       Tumor Data
                                       Available?
                                  Use Acceptable Time-
                                    to-Tumor Models,
                                  (e.g., Weibull, Time-
                                  Dependent Multistage)
                                 Use Acceptable Quantal
                                 Response Models (e.g.,
                                   Multistage [Crump],
                                 	Kodell Method)
                                           I
                                        Assume Dose
                                        Additivity
                                       Assume Dose
                                       Additivity
                                           I
                                        Calculate:
                                  1. Maximum Likelihood
                                     Estimates
                                  2. Upper Confidence
                                     Value
                                       Calculate:
                                     Maximum Likelihood
                                     Estimate
                                     Upper Confidence
                                     Value
          Figure 9-1.   CDHS Algorithm for Performing Dose-Response Assessments
                                          9-5
    

    -------
          7.  Pharmacokinetic data on  metabolism  of dosed  substances,  effective
             'dose at target site, or  species  differences  between  laboratory
              test animals and humans  shall  be considered  in  dose-response
              assessments when they are available.  When human  pharmacokinetic
              data are not available,  the assumption  is made  that  the  human
              response is the same as  the animal  response.
    
          8.  Because the dose of a regulated  carcinogen may  add to  the  doses
              from other carcinogens acting  by the same mechanisms,  the  CDHS
              will recommend the use of the  linearized 95  percent  upper
              confidence interval of risk as a dose-response  assessment
              guideline.  Although the Department will provide  risk  managers
              with a range of estimates including the Crump procedure  for the
              maximum likelihood estimate (MLE),  the  CDHS  will  consider
              alternative estimates provided during the public  comment period.
    
          9.  In scaling from animals  to humans,  the  Department will use the
              so-called surface area correction (correcting by  the 2/3 power  of
              weight) unless specific  evidence is available to  the contrary.
    
         10.  For the purposes of prioritization  carried  out  by control  agencies
              to decide the order in which substances should  undergo full scale
              risk assessment, it will be sufficient  to carry out  a simpler
              procedure of grouping substances into defined high,  medium, and
              low potency groups based on existing  risk assessments.
    
         11.  When exposure data from epidemiological studies are  sufficient  to
              establish human dose-response  curves,  human data should be
              included.
    
         12.  Properly conducted epidemiological  studies  that have sufficient
              follow-up and that show no statistically significant carcinogenic
              effect can be used to estimate the  largest  effect that is
              consistent with the data (the  95 percent  upper  confidence
              interval).
    
         13.  As California develops more experience  in  dose-response
              assessment, the CDHS will welcome proposals to  standardize
              technical details where appropriate for the next revision  of the
              guidelines.
    
    
         In its risk assessment for ethylene dibromide (EDB), CDHS assembled
    
    information on the chemical properties of EDB,  animal  and human toxicology,
    
    pharmacokinetics, animal and human reproductive effects and teratogenicity,
    
    genotoxicity, and animal and human carcinogenicity.   This review led to the
    
    conclusion that at ambient levels of EDB found  in urban environments in
    
    California, systemic and reproductive effects are unlikely.  However, CDHS
                                        9-6
    

    -------
    noted that EDB is "a potent carcinogen in more than one animal  species,  and
    could thus be of concern at low levels in the ambient air" (CARS,
    CDHS, 1985).
         The CDHS staff reviewed the one published epidemiological  study of
    161 workers.  Although this study failed to show a statistically significant
    increase in cancer rates, the study authors and CDHS agreed that the study
    can neither rule out nor establish EDB as a human carcinogen because of the
    small size of the population studied.  CDHS agreed with lARC's  conclusion
    that there is sufficient evidence of carcinogenicity in animals.  CDHS
    recommended that EDB be considered potentially carcinogenic in  humans.  The
    staff also concluded that there is no evidence to suggest that  the
    carcinogenicity of EDB would have a safe threshold (CARB, CDHS, 1985).
         The CDHS staff based their risk assessment on nasal malignancies
    (adenocarcinomas, carcinomas, and squamous cell carcinomas) in  male rats and
    hemangiosarcomas in female mice (CARB, CDHS, 1985).  These data used in the
    risk assessment were from two NCI bioassays:
    
         1.   an inhalation carcinogenesis bioassay for EDB in which male and
              female rats and mice were exposed to 10 and 40 ppm of EOB for
              periods from 78 to 103 weeks, and
         2.   a gavage study in which male and female rats were administered
              levels of EDB in corn oil by stomach tube for several months.
    
         The CDHS used three low-dose extrapolation models:  the multistage, the
    Wei bull-multi stage (a time-dependent multistage model), and the probit
    model.  The three models were executed using the Crump Global 79 program,
    the Howe and Crump Wei bull 82 program and the Kovar and Krewski program
    Risk 81, respectively (CARB, CDHS, 1985).  Presently, the CDHS also includes
    the maximum likelihood estimate and upper 95 percent confidence levels from
    the gamma multi-hit and logit-models for low-dose risk assessment to provide
    the risk managers with the range of variability due solely to the choice of
    the extrapolation model.
         The CDHS notes that considerations included in the choice of low-dose
    extrapolation models are:  simplicity, interpretability, biological
    plausibility, sensitivity to differences in the observable range, and
                                        9-7
    

    -------
    ability to take into account timing of exposure,  latency periods,  and
    competing risks.  The underlying principle behind the use of the multistage
    model is its property of being linear at low doses.   Additionally,  it
    provides more flexibility, relative to the one-hit model, in fitting
    non-linearities in the observed data.  The Wei bull-multi stage model  has
    these same properties as the simple multistage model  and, in addition,  it
    incorporates a latency period and uses fully the  data on survival  times
    which are available in the NCI carcinogenesis bioassays (CARB, CDHS, 1985).
         The CDHS staff examined risk estimates for all  three models for nasal
    malignancies (a site of first contact in the NCI  inhalation study  of male
    rats) and for hemangiosarcomas in the NCI study of female mice (a
    remote-site cancer which appeared in both gavage  and inhalation studies).
    The results from the risk assessment are summarized  in Table 9-1,  expressed
    as risk estimates for occupational exposure at 20 ppm and community exposure
    at 1 ppb using the three low-dose extrapolation models selected by CDHS.
    The CDHS recommended the use of an excess lifetime risk value between 102
    and 553 per million for each 1 ppb EDB exposure.   The CDHS noted that this
    lifetime risk from EDB exposure should be viewed in  the context of the
    overall probability of developing cancer, which is on the order of
    250,000 cases per million population (25 percent) over a 70-year lifetime
    (CARB, CDHS, 1985).  For regulatory considerations,  CDHS recommended using a
    risk value of 550 per million per 1 ppb EDB.
         In discussing their risk estimates, CDHS emphasized that the range
    between the maximum likelihood estimate and the 95 percent upper confidence
    limit represents only the statistical uncertainty introduced by the
    typically small size of the animal studies of carcinogenic effect.  Other
    important uncertainties are introduced by the choice of  a scaling factor
    between humans and animals, the choice of extrapolation models, and the
    additive, synergistic, or antagonistic effects of other chemicals.  The CDHS
    noted that synergism was demonstrated between EDB and disulfiram, a
    substance which interferes with EDB's metabolism.  On the other hand, DNA
    repair mechanisms, detoxifying enzymes, and other factors might lower the
    risk below what has been calculated.  These uncertainties are particularly
                                        9-8
    

    -------
                  TABLE 9-1.   LIFETIME  EXCESS  CANCER RISK  ESTIMATES
                              FOR ETHYLENE  DIBROMIDE (EDB)  EXPOSURE
    
    Species/Tumor
    Male Rats
    Nasal Malignancies
    
    
    Model
    Wei bull -
    Multistage
    Multistage
    Probit
    UCLa/MLEb
    95% UCL
    MLE
    95% UCL
    MLE
    95% UCL
    MLE
    20 ppm
    Occupational
    Exposure
    985/1000
    916/1000
    708/1000
    627/1000
    721/1000
    638/1000
    1 ppb
    Community
    Exposure
    553/million
    285/million
    315/million
    253/million
    51/million
    4/mi 1 1 i on
    Female Mice
    Hemanigiosarcomas
    
    
    Wei bull -
    Multistage
    Multistage
    Probit
    95% UCL
    MLE
    95% UCL
    MLE
    95% UCL
    MLE
    732/1000
    549/1000
    406/1000
    328/1000
    438/1000
    357/1000
    323/million
    203/million
    134/million
    102/million
    400/million
    34/million
     UCL  -  upper confidence limit
    5MLE  -  maximum likelihood estimate
                                        9-9
    

    -------
    to be noted in a case such as that of EDB where  the  ambient  exposures  are  at
    the low parts per trillion level,  while the  animal experiments  occurred  at
    exposure levels more than ten thousand times higher  (CARB, CDHS,  1985).
         The CDHS staff compared their risk estimates with  results  from eight
    other risk assessments.  Results were similar with the  exception  of one
    study in which CDHS disagreed with the use of combined  tumor data from
    several  studies, a practice which CDHS staff believes dilutes the calculated
    risk and is not the most conservative approach from  a public health
    standpoint.
    
    9.2.3  Exposure Assessment
    
         In a report to the scientific review panel  on a specific chemical such
    as EDB,  the California Air Resources Board (CARB) prepares  a review of the
    uses, emissions, and public exposure to the  particular  chemical.   The  CARB
    noted in its report that since EDB is not produced  in California  and since
    nearly all EDB pesticide use is banned, the  primary  source  of EDB emissions
    in the State is leaded gasoline.  (It is used as a  lead scavenger.)  The
    CARB information on EDB emissions was taken  primarily  in 1983,  prior to the
    ban on EDB as a pesticide.  Thus, CARB was unable to estimate exposures to
    EDB.  However, this type of data would be obtained during the risk
    management phase of regulation as part of the development of control
    measures (CARB, CDHS, 1985).
         The CARB has estimated exposure to several  other chemicals that have
    gone through the toxic air contaminant review process (CARB, CDHS, 1984;
    CARB, 1985; CARB, 1986a).  In the report to the  scientific review panel on
    benzene for example, CARB explained how monitoring  data on benzene
    concentrations in the South Coast Air Basin were used with population data
    to estimate the distribution of exposure versus  the number of people
    exposed.  The CARB also estimated benzene concentrations from specific
    sources to which people may be locally exposed (CARB,  CDHS,  1984).
         The CDHS "Guidelines for Chemical Carcinogen Risk Assessments and Their
    Scientific Rationale"  (CDHS, 1985) cover carcinogen identification and
    dose-response assessment.  The guidelines do not cover exposure  assessment.
                                        9-10
    

    -------
    9.2.4  CAPCOA Source Assessment Manual
    
         The local air quality management districts perceive the need to
    evaluate proposed projects prior to the full implementation of the State
    process for identifying and regulating toxic air contaminants.  The
    California Air Pollution Control Officers Association (CAPCOA), CDHS, and
    CARB, with funding and coordination from EPA Region IX, are working on
    completing a source assessment manual for air pollution control districts.
    Currently in draft form, the manual provides a step-by-step approach to
    estimating and assessing the public health impacts of individual sources of
    toxic air contaminants.  The manual is intended to give guidance to air
    pollution control districts and air quality management districts that must
    review permit applications for new or modified sources of pollutants that
    have not undergone the complete CARB and CDHS listing process, health
    effects review, and study of possible control measures
    (Engineering-Science, 1986).
         The manual presents two levels of procedures:  an iterative screening
    technique using progressively more realistic exposure assumptions and a
    methodology for a formal source assessment.  The iterative screening level
    analysis is based on simplified assumptions that ensure the protection of
    public health and safety and is designed to simplify evaluation of
    applications for permits.  Formal assessment is required if the project does
    not pass the screening analysis or if the APCD feels a more detailed
    assessment is necessary (Engineering-Science, 1986).  Both levels of
    assessment are presented for description of emission rates, estimation of
    ambient air concentrations, description of the exposed population,
    estimation of exposure from noninhalation pathways, and assessment of health
    risks.
         The screening analysis for estimating ambient air concentrations uses
    an approach that is very protective of public health, designed to result  in
    health-conservative estimates of concentrations around the facility.  The
    screening technique is only applicable to continuous, steady-state releases
    that are either neutral or positively buoyant.  A simple screening analysis
    can be done by hand or a slightly more sophisticated screening analysis can
                                        9-11
    

    -------
    be done using a microcomputer.   The procedure yields  a  1-hour  groundlevel
    concentration which is a worst-case scenario for screening  purposes
    (Engineering-Science,  1986).
         The formal assessment of ambient concentrations  relies on refined
    estimates of the facility's impacts on ambient concentrations  based  on
    actual meteorological  data.  The applicant must be familiar with EPA's
    Guideline on Air Quality Models in order to select the  most appropriate
    dispersion model.  After completion of the modeling effort, the manual
    recommends that applicants submit the following results for both the
    worst-plausible and most-plausible cases:  (1) predicted concentration
    (short-term and annual average) of each substance at each location
    (population-weighted centroid of the smallest census division  available),
    (2) maximum short-term concentration of each substance  at each location
    within 2 km of the source where sensitive individuals are located, and
    (3) monitored or modeled background concentrations and  cumulative impacts
    with other sources.  The appropriate short-term averaging time would vary
    depending on the type of releases and the health effects of concern
    (Engineering-Science,  1986).
         For the description of the exposed population, the screening analysis
    presented in the manual recommends a qualitative description of the location
    of the proposed facility.  This includes a discussion of whether the area is
    urban or rural, densely or sparsely populated, and industrial  or
    industrial/commercial.in nature.  In addition, the manual recommends
    identifying any sensitive receptor locations (e.g., schools, hospitals,
    retirement communities) within 2 km of the point of maximum concentration.
    For the screening assessment, the manual acknowledges that rough estimates
    of the exposed population will  often suffice.  To quantify the inhabitants
    within a specific distance, the manual recommends census data at the tract
    level (census tracts contain about 4000 people).  If the APCD feels it is
    warranted, the applicant may also need to estimate the number of workers,
    other than those employed at the proposed or modified facility, that would
    be exposed.  The manual points out that while there may only be a few nearby
    residents, many workers may be exposed, especially in the  case of industrial
    parks (Engineering-Science, 1986).
                                        9-12
    

    -------
         A formal assessment of population exposed requires that the applicant
    provide a detailed analysis of both residents and off-site workers,
    apportioning the populations into smaller geographic areas based on  census
    tracts (Engineering-Science, 1986).
         The manual requires the calculation of the most-plausible and
    worst-plausible cases for the excess lifetime carcinogenic risk, the excess
    lifetime population cancer burden and the population-weighted excess
    lifetime cancer risk for the formal risk assessments.   The project
    proponents will be encouraged, in the final version of the manual, to
    provide the uncertainty associated with each of these six parameters.  This
    uncertainty in the risk estimates may be provided in either a probabilistic
    format (e.g., Monte Carlo methods) or analytically (e.g., sensitivity
    analysis) to give the risk managers and the general public an idea of the
    potential range of these risks.  Additionally, they will be encouraged to
    identify and discuss those exposure assumptions that strongly affect the
    risk assessment.
    
    9.3  RISK MANAGEMENT
    
         Under California air laws, after a pollutant has undergone a risk
    assessment study by CARS and CDHS and has been identified as a toxic air
    contaminant, the risk management process begins.  Control measures are
    investigated and, in cooperation with the APCDs and the public, CARB
    prepares a report on the need and appropriate degree of regulation of the
    particular contaminant.  This was done, for example, for benzene  in  1986
    (CARB, 1986b).  Following a public comment period and a public hearing, CARB
    adopts control measures (NATICH, 1984).  Sources of emissions determined to
    have a biological threshold of action will be required to operate in a
    manner that will ensure the threshold level will not be exceeded.  For
    contaminants with no identifiable threshold  (i.e., carcinogens),  control
    measures must be designed to reduce emissions to the lowest level achievable
    through the application of the best available control technology  unless an
    alternative level of emission reduction is adequate or necessary  to  prevent
    adverse public health effects (NATICH, 1984).
                                        9-13
    

    -------
    9.4  RESOURCES
    
         On the CDHS staff, six people in the Air Unit  of the Office  of
    Environmental Health Hazard Evaluation are currently  involved  in  risk
    assessment work with air toxics.   These include  experts  in medicine,
    toxicology, epidemiology, biostatistics,  and  law.   The CDHS  has done risk
    assessments for several chemicals (see Sections  9.5 and  9.6) and  the
    estimated staff time has ranged from about 700 to 2000 person-hours per
    chemical.  The ethylene dibromide study was one  of  the shorter risk
    assessments, taking an estimated 700 to 800 person-hours on  the part of  the
    CDHS staff.
         The CDHS has acquired most of the low-dose  extrapolation  models in
    current use.  Many of these models are run on the CDHS IBM mainframe
    computer, while others (e.g., the multistage  model) are  run  on personal
    computers using the available packaged software  programs.
    
    9.5  OTHER RISK ASSESSMENT WORK
    
         In addition to the work on toxic air contaminants,  the  Air  Unit  is
    required by State law to review the health risk  assessments  for  resource
    recovery projects, including municipal waste  incinerators,  in  order to help
    local air districts decide whether the facilities  will cause any significant
    increase in illness or mortality.  The unit also consults  with local
    agencies and individuals about actual or planned air  releases  of both
    carcinogens and noncarcinogens, including potential catastrophic air
    releases.  Finally, the unit is responsible for  review from the  health
    standpoint of ambient air standards for criteria pollutants  such as ozone.
    
    9.6  AIR TOXICS STATUS
    
         The following chemicals for which CDHS,  in  conjunction with CARB, has
    published risk assessments under the toxic air contaminants program,  have
    been declared to be toxic air contaminants:  asbestos, benzene,  cadmium and
    cadmium compounds, chromium  (Cr VI), dioxins and dibenzofurans,  ethylene
                                        9-14
    

    -------
    dibromide, and ethylene dichloride.  As of May 1, 1987, the following
    substances are in the process of assessment:  arsenic, carbon tetrachloride,
    ethylene oxide, methylene chloride, perch!oroethylene, trichloroethylene,
    and vinyl chloride.  Among the substances currently identified for future
    risk assessment work are nickel, chloroform, acetaldehyde, acrylonitrile,
    beryllium, 1,3-butadiene, coke-oven emissions, dialkyl-nitrosamines,
    1,4-dioxane, epichlorohydrin, formaldehyde, inorganic lead, mercury,
    n-nitrosomorpholine, PAHs, PCBs, and radionuclides.
         For additional information on the CDHS risk assessment work with air
    toxics, readers may contact Dr. James Collins at (415) 540-2669.
                                        9-15
    

    -------
                   10.0  MICHIGAN DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL RESOURCES
    
    10.1 OBJECTIVES IN UNDERTAKING RISK ASSESSMENT
    
         In Michigan, existing rules state that a person may not emit air
    contaminants that cause "injurious effects to human health or safety, animal
    life, plant life of significant value, or property."  Permit applicants for
    sources that would emit any pollutant identified as carcinogenic must plan
    to equip that source with the best available control technology and either
    show that controlled emissions will not be detectable in the stack by
    specified sensitive sampling and analytical methods or, if the controlled
    emissions are above the detection limit, show that the emissions are
    "environmentally acceptable."  The current method of choice for this
    demonstration is risk assessment, calculating the lifetime carcinogenic risk
    (Wurzel et al., 1984).  The Air Quality Division first used risk assessment
    in 1981 to evaluate the acceptability of emissions from a pigment
    manufacturing plant (Simon, 1987b).  Michigan's Department of Natural
    Resources (DNR) does both chemical-specific and site-specific risk
    assessments.  The chemical-specific assessments result in unit risk factors
    (Simon, 1986) and the site-specific assessments calculate expected
    carcinogenic risk for a specific proposed facility (MDNR, 1986).  Risk
    assessments have not been mandated by the legislature, nor have specific air
    toxics rules been promulgated.
    
    10.2 GENERAL OVERVIEW OF METHODOLOGY USED
    
    10.2.1  Hazard Identification
    
         For the purposes of air use permit review, the DNR considers as
    carcinogens "compounds which have sufficient data indicating carcinogenic
    potential  in animals and compounds which are known to cause an increased
    risk of cancer in humans" (Wurzel et al., 1984).  This classification is
                                        10-1
    

    -------
    made based on review of available studies where the final  results  indicate  a
    carcinogenic potential, and the route of exposure and  conditions of the
    study are appropriate.
         The Air Quality Division (AQD)  of the MDNR does not have formal
    guidelines or rules for carcinogen identification.   In general,  however,  a
    chemical will be considered carcinogenic and risk assessment used  for
    evaluating the emissions if the chemical causes an increased incidence of
    benign or malignant neoplasms or a substantial  decrease in the latency
    period between exposure and onset of neoplasms  through oral, dermal, or
    inhalation exposure in at least one mammalian species, or man through
    epidemiological and/or clinical studies (Simon, 1987b).  This approach is
    consistent with guidelines and rules adopted by MDNR for other environmental
    protection programs.  The MDNR has promulgated a rule defining "carcinogen"
    in a similar manner in the Part 4 - Water Quality Standard which are rules
    related to the discharge of chemicals to the waters of the State.   In
    addition, the draft criteria revisions of the Michigan Critical Materials
    Register define sufficient evidence of carcinogenicity in a similar manner.
         The DNR AQD recently developed a unit cancer risk factor for
    3-chloro-2-methylpropene.  A review of available literature revealed one
    chronic animal study.  In this study, 3-chloro-2-methylpropene was
    administered by gavage to male and female rats and mice five days per week
    for 103 weeks.  The results showed an increased  incidence of squamous cell
    neoplasms in the forestomach of both male and female rats and mice.   In
    addition to the animal bioassay, several short-term mutagenicity tests have
    been conducted for this compound.  Positive results for mutagenicity  have
    been shown in four test systems.  No human epidemiology studies were
    available.  Based on this information, the AQD proceeded with a
    dose-response assessment (Simon, 1986).
         Studies showing a chemical to be carcinogenic from the oral exposure
    route will also be used in determining the carcinogenic potential by
    inhalation, unless there are specific data that  indicate the results  seen
    from exposure by one route are not appropriate to consider  for other  routes.
    In the case of forestomach tumors in mice by oral exposure, the compound may
    be acting directly at  the site of application.   Thus,  exposure by  inhalation
                                         10-2
    

    -------
    may also produce tumors at the site of application (i.e., respiratory
    system).  In the case of 3-chloro-2-methylpropene, specific data were not
    available that indicated the gavage route was inappropriate to consider for
    inhalation exposure.  Additionally, although there are some discrepancies in
    the mutagenicity data, overall the data indicate that this compound is a
    direct-acting mutagen.  These data provide additional support that the
    compound may produce tumors at the site of application when inhaled
    (Simon, 1987b).
    
    10.2.2  Dose-Response Assessment
    
         The DNR acknowledges that "the estimation of risk and, conversely, the
    estimation of 'essentially safe' exposures has always been a difficult
    problem" mainly because the effects are determined on a relatively small
    number of animals at high dose levels.  These effects must be translated
    into risk estimates for humans at much lower doses.  For extrapolation of
    test data to the low dose region of the dose-response curve, DNR has adopted
    the linearized multistage model.  The DNR notes that this model "has the
    best, although limited, scientific basis of any of the current mathematical
    extrapolation models," adding that risk assessments made with this model are
    generally conservative and represent the most plausible upper limit for the
    risk.  In other words, the risk is not likely to be higher than the
    estimate, but could be lower (Wurzel, 1984).
         The DNR requires that animal bioassay data used in the model be from
    studies that are "conducted with appropriate controls, at known exposure
    levels, with sufficient survival to allow statistical analyses to be
    completed, and a statistically significant increase in tumor incidence"
    (Wurzel et al., 1984).  Animal potencies are converted to human potency
    values based on the relative surface area rule (see Section 3.0)
    (Wurzel et al., 1984).
         In the 3-chloro-2-methylpropene risk assessment, the linearized
    multistage model (GLOBAL 82) was fit to the data from the gavage study
    described above.  Unit risk values were determined for male and female mice
    and rats.  Based on the estimate for male mice, DNR concluded that the unit
                                        10-3
    

    -------
    risk value for humans is 3.83 x 10"   (ug/m )"  .   Using  this  unit  risk
    factor, DNR estimated that the concentration of  3-chloro-2-methy'lpropene  in
    air resulting in an increased cancer risk of one in  one million  is
    0.03 ug/m  (Simon,  1986).  Generally,  the results from  the animal  species
    providing the highest estimate of risk will be used  to  estimate the  risks
    for humans, since humans may be as sensitive as  the  most sensitive  animal
    species (Simon,  1987b).
    
    10.2.3  Exposure Assessment
         Wurzel (1984) explained the general  approach used by DNR in the past
    for exposure assessments by noting:
         "The maximum annual ground level concentration should be determined by
    a long term dispersion model and the maximum emission rate in pounds per
    hour.  It should be assumed the maximum emission rate occurs continuously
    24 hours per day, 365 days per year, and that the estimated risk is for an
    individual who remains at the maximum ground level concentration
    continuously for 70 years and absorbs 100 percent of the inhaled compound
    (inhaling 20 cubic meters of air per day)."
         The DNR's AQD is currently reevaluating this methodology for
    noncontinuous, less than lifetime emissions of carcinogenic compounds.  As a
    screening methodology, the AQD still feels the approach described in
    Wurzel et al., 1984 is appropriate.   However, in cases where the cancer risk
    exceeds one in one million and the emissions are not representative of
    continuous exposure, the AQD is attempting to provide an estimate of risk
    more representative of the actual exposure situation.  The design individual
    for the exposure assessment is still a 70 kg person who inhales 20 cubic
    meters of air per day (Simon, 1987b).
         No exposure assessment was necessary for 3-chloro-2-methylpropene.  A
    carcinogenic potency value was determined for this compound because a permit
    application was received from a company that would be emitting this
    compound.  It was assumed that the maximum emission rate would occur
    continuously, and that a 70 kg person inhaling 20 cubic meters of air per
    day would be exposed to the maximum ground level concentration (beyond the
                                        10-4
    

    -------
    property line) for a lifetime.  Under this exposure scenario, the estimated
    risk was less than one in one million, so the emissions were considered
    environmentally acceptable.
         In the site-specific risk assessment for emissions from a proposed
    municipal solid waste-to-energy facility, the AQD analyzed the risks
    associated with the emissions of trace metals (cadmium, chromium, and
    arsenic) and organics (dioxins and furans).  The Division described this as
    a "health-conservative analysis."  Risk was measured in terms of the maximum
    individual excess cancer risk or the individual's additional lifetime
    probability of developing cancer due to emissions from the proposed
    facility.  The risk assessment was based on the assumption that a person
    would be exposed to the maximum ambient concentration continuously for an
    entire lifetime.  The Division noted that the actual risk from the proposed
    facility should not exceed this maximum calculated value and is likely to be
    much lower (MDNR, 1986).
         The AQD assumed that at low doses, carcinogenic risk increases linearly
    with dose and that risk equals the exposure level, or dose, multiplied by
    the potency.  To estimate exposure level, the AQD used emission rates from
    similar facilities controlled to a lesser degree than the proposed facility,
    noting that such emissions estimates will result in a conservative risk
    estimate.  The emissions data for the metals were modeled using the Michigan
    Long Term dispersion model to estimate the maximum annual ground level
    concentration (MDNR, 1986).
         The carcinogenic potency was determined for each chemical by a
    mathematical extrapolation of animal or human test data.  The DNR noted that
    the extrapolation models used in this risk assessment provided a rough but
    plausible estimate of the upper limit of risk.  Table 10-1 lists the results
    of this analysis (MDNR, 1986).
         Estimation of carcinogenic risks from dioxins and furans was more
    difficult due to the large number of compounds in these categories.  Since
    there is toxicity data for only a very small fraction of the total number of
    compounds, the AQD chose an alternate approach to risk assessment.  This
    method,  known as the toxic equivalency factor (TEF) approach, is widely
    accepted for assessing risks from dioxins and furans.  The TEF method is
                                        10-5
    

    -------
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    o
    UJ
    1-
    ^£
    I-H
    8
    CO '-
    CO VO
    *f GO
    o»
    O rH
    
    oe
    to z
    Z 0
    o s.
    HH ^"^
    l-
    CE Z
    1- UJ
    II
    ^£ *"~*
    O O
    ^2
    1 f_J
    ill
    > _J
    UJ <.
    _J rH
    (—
    a z
    Z UJ
    Q£ CL
    tr
    z o
    ^^ ^L»
    ~*
     o
    tJ -"
    0 X
    ^^ 1*^
    X
    UJ
    
    "(0 r- C
    3 0) O
    C > -r-
    C fl> -P
    < _| <0 *^
    i- cn
    •o -o -P E
    vD C C \
    •P 3 0) O>
    U O U 3
     T-
    C Q) -P ^
    < _j 10 on
    
    E TO -p \
    3 C C O)
    E 3 CO 3
    
    z c3
    
    
    
    
    
    
    (O
    U
    U)
    •r"
    ly
    
    •p
    
    C
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    •p
    C
    5
    3
    
    *o
    a.
    
    
    
    
    
    "~i "I
    0 0
    
    
    
    
    
    
    in in
    i i
    0 0
    rH rH
    
    X X
    
    rH rH
    cn CT>
    
    in cn
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    cn o
    0 rH
    
    
    
    
    
    *t in
    1 1
    0 O
    rH rH
    
    X X
    
    O* vO
    CM CM
    •-H cn
    rH 00
    
    
    
    
    
    
    cn CM
    i i
    0 0
    rH rH
    
    X X
    
    00 
    U)
    
    -------
    based on homologue groups of polychlorinated dibenzo-p-dioxins (PCDD)  and
    polychlorinated dibenzofurans (PCDF).   There are eight homologue groups
    based on the degree of chlorination (MDNR,  1986).
         The Division explained that these homologues are then further divided
    into two subgroups, one consisting of those isomers with chlorine atoms in
    the 2,3,7, and 8 positions, and the other subgroup containing all other
    isomers.  The groups are then assigned a TEF which weighs the toxicity of
    this group compared to the most toxic isomer, 2,3,7,8-TCDD.  Table 10-2
    lists the various TEFs for each group.  The TEFs for those isomers having
    chlorine atoms in the 2,3,7, and 8 positions are larger, since these are
    believed to be the more toxic isomers.  The concentration of each PCDD and
    PCDF homologue subgroup is then multiplied by its corresponding TEF to
    express the toxicity of each group in terms of "equivalent amount of
    2,3,7,8-TCDD."  The toxic equivalents for each group are then added up to
    determine the total 2,3,7,8-TCDD toxic equivalents.  This value is then
    multiplied by the carcinogenic potency for 2,3,7,8-TCDD to determine the
    total carcinogenic risk for the mixture of PCDDs and PCDFs (MDNR, 1986).
         Homologue distributions used in this risk assessment were taken from a
    compilation of literature sources.  Using this emission data, the TEF
    approach, and atmospheric dispersion modeling, it was determine that the
    maximum ambient ground level concentration of PCDDs and PCDFs in
                                                 8     3
    2,3,7,8-TCDD toxic equivalents was 2.42 x 10   ug/m .  This concentration
    was then multiplied by the carcinogenic potency for 2,3,7,8-TCDD to estimate
    the excess cancer risk due to the PCDD and PCDF emissions.  The resulting
    risk is 1.1 in a million.  Risks based on expected emission levels are
    listed in Table 10-1 (MDNR, 1986).
    
    10.2.4  'Risk Characterization
    
         The risk assessment for the waste-to-energy facility  (MDNR, 1986)
    included some qualifying explanations that helped characterize the risks
    presented.  The assessment explained that only exposure via inhalation was
    considered.  Based on studies that have estimated percent of total risk
    attributable to various routes of exposure, the AQD estimated that as a
                                        10-7
    

    -------
    TABLE 10-2.  TOXIC EQUIVALENCY FACTORS  FOR  PCDDs AND  PCDFs  (MDNR,  1986)
           Compound
          Toxic
    Equivalency Factor
      Mono through tri CDD
    
      2,3,7,8-TCDD
      Other TCDDs
    
      2,3,7,8-PeCDDs
      Other PeCDDs
    
      2,3,7,8-HxCDDs
      Other HxCDDs
    
      2,3,7,8-HpCDDs
      Other HpCDDs
    
      OCDD
           1
           0.01
    
           0.5
           0.005
    
           0.04
           0.0004
    
           0.001
           0.00001
      Mono through tri CDF
    
      2,3,7,8-TCDFs
      Other TCDFs
    
      2,3,7,8-PeCDFs
      Other PeCDFs
    
      2,3,7,8-HxCDFs
      Other HxCDFs
    
      2,3,7,8-HpCDFs
      Other HpCDFs
    
      OCDF
           0.1
           0.001
    
           0.1
           0.001
    
           0.01
           0.0001
    
           0.001
           0.00001
                                     10-8
    

    -------
    worse case, other routes of exposure could contribute 50 percent to total
    risk.  This would make the risk from all routes of exposure twice that
    estimated for inhalation only (MDNR, 1986).
         The AQD evaluated the significance of the risks by comparing risks from
    the proposed facility to common risks people face everyday.  This comparison
    was included in the AQD report for the general public and others who were
    not familiar with risk assessment to provide a better understanding of the
    magnitude of the risk numbers for the waste-to-energy facility.  These
    comparisons included risk of death from motor vehicle accident, drowning,
    and accidents in several sports as well as extrapolated cancer risks from
    medical X-rays, smoking, peanut butter consumption (aflatoxin) and other
    similar activities.  From this comparison, the AQD concluded that people are
    routinely exposed to risks which greatly exceed those expected from the
    proposed facility (MDNR, 1986).
    
    10.3 RISK MANAGEMENT
    
         As mentioned in Section 10.1, the Michigan Air Pollution Control
    Commission must verify "environmental acceptability" prior to granting a
    permit to a facility that would emit a carcinogen.  The Commission reviews
    the lifetime carcinogenic risk and has, in the past, deemed emissions
    "environmentally acceptable" if the estimated risk is less than one in
    one million (Wurzel et al., 1984).  Emissions resulting in a risk greater
    than one in one million are considered on a case-by-case basis
    (Simon, 1987b).
         In evaluating the proposed waste-to-energy facility, the AQD determined
    this facility would be using state-of-the-art combustion and control
    equipment (dry acid gas scrubbers and fabric filter).  Based upon all
    considerations, the AQD determined the proposed facility would comply with
    all applicable State and Federal air quality regulations, even though the
    maximum estimated risk was slightly higher than one in one million
    (Simon, 1987b).
                                        10-9
    

    -------
    10.4 RESOURCE REQUIREMENTS
    
         For risk assessment work,  the Air Quality Division  has  found  it
    important to have toxicologists on their staff for low-dose  extrapolation
    analyses as well as dispersion  modelers and engineers  for estimating
    emissions in exposure assessments.  The time necessary to complete chemical -
    or site-specific risk assessments such as those described in this  section
    varies with the amount of data  that must be reviewed.  Development of the
    unit cancer risk factor for 3-chloro-2-methylpropene took about three days
    on the part of one toxicologist.  As for the waste-to-energy facility, much
    more time was required.  Prior  to the specific permit  application, a  team  of
    two engineers and a toxicologist spent several months  studying similar
    facilities.  The risk assessment done for the permit application took the
    team plus a meteorologist for dispersion modeling* several weeks to complete.
         The AQD currently uses the linearized multistage  model  GLOBAL 82 on
    their mainframe computer.  In addition, several common air dispersion models
    are also used.
    
    10.5 OTHER RISK ASSESSMENT WORK
    
         Table 10-3 lists the pollutants that have been addressed by the
    Division.  The AQD has no plans or lists of chemicals for which they will  be
    doing risk assessments.  Risk assessments are done on chemicals as the need
    arises (e.g., a permit application is received for a compound for which no
    previous risk assessment has been done).
    
    10.6 ADVICE TO OTHER AGENCIES
    
         In general, use of risk assessment provides a methodology for
    evaluating the public health effects from the emissions of carcinogenic
    compounds according to the AQD.  With a technology based program, the
    expected health impacts are not known, and regulators cannot be sure of
    protecting public health.  A technology based program may also result in the
    use of additional control equipment when this is not necessary to protect
    public health (Simon, 1987b).
    
                                        10-10
    

    -------
        TABLE 10-3.  MICHIGAN DIVISION OF AIR QUALITY CARCINOGENIC CHEMICALS
                     AND ASSOCIATED AIR CONCENTRATIONS RESULTING IN A
                     1 x 10'° CANCER RISK {SIMON, 1987a)
    
                                                                              3
            Chemical                                       Concentration (ug/m )
    
    Acrylonitrile                                                  0.01
    o-Anisidine hydrochloride                                      0.04
    Arsenic                                                        2.3E-04
    Benzene                                                        0.14
    Benzo(a)pyrene                                                 3.0E-04
    Bis(2-chloroethyl)ether                                        0.003
    1,3-Butadiene                                                  0.003
    Cadmium                                                        5.6E-04
    Carbon tetrachloride                                           0.04
    Chlorodibromomethane                                           0.04
    Chloroform                                                     0.02
    3-Chloro-2-methylpropene                                       0.03
    l-Chloro-2-nitrobenzene                                        0.21
    Chromium VI                                                    8.3E-05
    DDT                                                            0.003
    Dichlorobenzidine                                              0.002
    Diethylhexyl phthalate                                         0.23
    Dimethylvinyl chloride                                         0.008
    1,4-Dioxane                                                    0.18
    Epichlorohydrin                                                0.8
    Ethyl acrylate                                                 0.07
    Ethylene dichloride                                            0.09
    Ethylene oxide                                                 0.03
    Formaldehyde                                                   0.09
    Hexachlorobenzene                                              0.002
    Hydrazine                                                      0.003
    Methyl chloride                                                1.6
    MBOCA                                                          0.03
                                        10-11
    

    -------
        TABLE 10-3.  MICHIGAN DIVISION OF AIR QUALITY  CARCINOGENIC  CHEMICALS
                     AND ASSOCIATED AIR CONCENTRATIONS RESULTING  IN A
                     1 x 10"5 CANCER RISK (SIMON,  1987a)  (Continued)
    
    
    
            Chemical                                       Concentration  (ug/m  )
    
    
    Methylene chloride                                             1
    2-Naphthylamine                                                1.3E-04
    
    PCB (Aroclor 1260)                                             0.001
    
    Propylene oxide                                                1.6
    
    2,3,7,8-TCDD                                                   2.3E-08
    1,1,1,2-Tetrachloroethane                                      0.07
    
    1,1,2,2-Tetrachloroethane                                      0.02
    
    Tetrachloroethylene                                            1.7
    
    Toxaphene                                                      0.003
    TRIS                                                           0.002
    
    Vinyl chloride                                                 0.4
    
    2,6-Xylidine                                                   0.78
    
    
    Date of this revision:  November 25, 1986        ,
    Unit risk factor - 1 x 10   / concentration (ug/m )
    
    Note;  These values are subject to change.  The chemicals found in this table
    should not be considered an inclusive list of all  chemicals considered
    carcinogenic by the AQD.  This table consists of chemicals that have
    previously been reviewed by the AQD, and were considered carcinogenic at the
    time of review.  Absence of a chemical from this list does not necessarily
    mean that chemical would be considered noncarcinogenic by the AQD.  Chemicals
    may be added to or deleted from this list as the data warrant.  The 1 x 10"
    cancer risk values listed in this table are not promulgated ambient air
    quality standards, and are also subject to change.
    The 1 x 10   cancer risk values listed in the table were determined under the
    following conditions or assumptions:
    
    1.  A linear nonthreshold extrapolation model was used for each risk
        assessment.  The model used in most cases was the linearized multistage
        model.
    2.  When extrapolating from animal data, doses were assumed to be equivalent
        between animals and humans on a relative body surface area basis.
    3.  The 1 x 10   cancer risk values were calculated for a 70 kilogram person
        who inhales 20 cubic meters of air per day.
    4.  Exposure was assumed to occur through direct inhalation only.
    5.  Exposure was assumed to occur for 24 hours per day, 7 days per week, for
        a lifetime.
                                        10-12
    

    -------
         The AQD stressed the need of having an adequate staff to do the
    necessary analyses associated with risk assessment.  Two of the problems now
    facing the AQD are the need for good emissions data and the need for a
    monitoring program to determine compliance with designated acceptable
    ambient concentrations.  A third concern is the designation of an acceptable
    risk.  It has been the AQD's experience that many members of the public want
    no additional risk from toxic emissions, while others argue that the risks
    posed by toxic sources are ridiculously low.
         For more information on the risk assessment work undertaken by
    Michigan's Air Quality Division, readers may contact Catherine Simon at
    (517) 373-7023.
                                        10-13
    

    -------
                         11.0  CLARK COUNTY HEALTH DISTRICT
    
    11.1 OBJECTIVES IN UNDERTAKING RISK ASSESSMENT
    
         In early 1985, after reviewing EPA's 1984 draft report entitled "The
    Magnitude and Nature of the Air Toxics Problem in the United States"
    (EPA, 1984c), the Clark County Health District (the District) attempted to
    address the magnitude and nature of the air toxics problem in Las Vegas.
    The draft report estimated that perhaps 1,700 cancers per year nationwide
    could be attributed to outdoor air pollution.
    
    11.2 GENERAL OVERVIEW OF METHODOLOGY USED
    
    11.2.1  Hazard Identification
    
         Although, over 50 chemicals had been considered in the draft EPA
    report, most of the risk was assigned to fewer than 10 chemical substances
    (arsenic, asbestos, benzene, carbon tetrachloride, chloroform, chromium,
    perchloroethylene, products of incomplete combustion).  For these
    substances, the District had some knowledge of their emissions and/or air
    quality levels in the Las Vegas Valley.  Most air quality measurements were
    obtained from an established station in east central Las Vegas which has a
    history of high CO and TSP levels, and from a station in the Southeast
    Las Vegas Valley which had a history of high ozone levels and complaints of
    chlorine odors and eye burning.  The toxics data were derived from the
    District's efforts to characterize urban haze and to develop specific
    hydrocarbon profiles to support Emperical Kinetic Modeling Approach (EKMA)
    ozone modeling exercises.  The urban haze research provided short-term
    (certain hours of the day) data for various metals and carbonaceous
    material.  Local topsoil was also analyzed to assess crustal contributions.
                                        11-1
    

    -------
    11.2.2  Dose-Response Assessment
    
         EPA's draft report included the unit risk factors  obtained  from CA6  and
    others.  In reviewing the unit risk factors obtained  in the  draft report,
    the District staff observed that there was no unit risk factor for asbestos
    and that the unit risk factor for products of incomplete combustion used  a
    factor based upon the amount of benzo(a)pyrene present.
         For asbestos, the District obtained unit risk factors from  the report
    by the National Research Council (Committee on Non-Occupational  Health
    Risks) entitled "Asbestiform Fibers - Non-Occupational  Risks."  This report
    contains risk factors based upon fibers per volume.
         For products of incomplete combustion (PICs), the District  assumed this
    pollutant could be indicated as total carbon and analyzed by a thermal
    oxidation technique.  The District had an abundance of data for  total carbon
    particles in the Valley.  However, these data were not compatible with risk
    data using the specific benzo(a)pyrene substance.  Two sources of
    information were consulted to obtain a unit risk cancer factor.   One was the
    article entitled "Health Risks of Diesel Vehicles" published in
    Environmental Science Technology. January 1984.  This article derived a
    range of lifetime unit risk factors of 30 to 60 additional lung cancer
    deaths per microgram per cubic meter of particulate per million  persons.
    The article reviewed bioassay data from several types of fuel combustion and
    the District determined that fireplace smoke, gasoline engine smoke, and
    diesel soot could all have approximately the same unit risk factor.
    Secondly, EPA published technical documentation in 1984 for its proposal to
    limit diesel engine particulate emissions.  The EPA estimated unit risk
    factors ranging from 18 to 98 per microgram per cubic meter per million
    persons.  The District chose the narrower range of 30 to 60 for their risk
    characterizations.
    
    11.2.3  Exposure Assessment
    
         The District used various techniques for estimating the annual  average
    concentration of each pollutant.  The risk estimates assigned to  asbestos,
    perchloroethylene, and chromium were questionable because the District had
    
                                         11-2
    

    -------
    limited ambient air data for these pollutants.   In the case of asbestos,  the
    only data available were based upon samples analyzed by polarized light
    microscopy.  The preferred technique is transmission electron microscopy.
    The chromium and other heavy metal concentrations were obtained from a haze
    study which evaluated only fine particles associated with haze.  The
    analytical technique was X-ray fluorescence.  Ambient levels of
    perchloroethylene were estimated from the District's emissions inventory
    data.
         To determine average annual levels of most volatile organic compounds
    and asbestos, the District set up sampling projects designed to sample once
    every six days, 24 hours per day.  For hydrocarbons, this project spanned a
    12-month period from September 1985 to August 1986.  Samples were analyzed
    for hydrocarbons and chlorinated hydrocarbons by 6C-MS.  The updated study
    verified the earlier benzene and toluene estimates but revealed much lower
    perchloroethylene levels.
         Ten 24-hour asbestos samples were collected during the last 6 months of
    1986.  The results indicated that asbestos fibers were under the detection
    limit of 1,000 fibers per cubic meter.  This analysis verifies the presence
    of non-asbestiform fibers which apparently accounted for higher numbers
    reported earlier by the polarized light microscopy method.
         Chromium and other metals were collected in a neighborhood with high CO
    and woodsmoke and in the vicinity of a busy truckstop.  Soils were also
    sampled.  The chromium levels were about double the detection limit.  Levels
    of arsenic, cadmium, and nickel were less than their detection limit.  Use
    of these detection limits in the risk assessment results in significant
    upper bounds.
         While these follow-up activities were underway, EPA published its final
    results in the May 1985 Journal of the Air Pollution Control Association.
    This report lowered the estimate of the national incidence of cancer from
    1,700 to 1,300.
    
    11.2.4  Risk Characterization
    
         The District initially estimated average annual Valley-wide, levels for
    11 chemical substances based on short-term data and multiplied these levels
    times the unit risk factors to arrive at an annual cancer incidence per
                                        11-3
    

    -------
    million persons in the Valley.  Results of this compilation showed that
    products of incomplete combustion,  asbestos,  benzene,  perchloroethylene,  and
    chromium accounted for most of the  incidence  of nine cancers per million
    people per year.  This estimated total  incidence compared favorably with  the
    estimate in EPA's draft report.
         The District then refined estimates of annual  averages of the chemical
    substances of interest and recalculated the annual  Valley-wide cancer
    incidence.  Table 11-1 lists the chemical  substances,  assumed unit risk
    factors, the estimated average annual  level,  and the calculated annual
    incidence per chemical.  Totaling the  chemicals, the District calculated
    that the annual incidence is 4.3 to 9.4 cancers per million people per year.
    The PICs have the largest incidence.  The PICs are generated almost equally
    by three sources:  cars using leaded gasoline, diesel  trucks and buses, and
    wood burning fireplaces.  Since these  particles also impair visibility and
    irritate sensitive persons, the District has  endeavored to focus on the most
    tangible component of PICs:  urban  haze.
    
    11.3 ONGOING ACTIVITIES
    
         The District has stressed that winter morning haze is caused by older
    vehicles using leaded gasoline, vehicles using diesel fuel, and by persons
    burning wood in their fireplaces.  The staff has continuously monitored haze
    with nephelometers at two Valley stations since late 1980.  The intensity of
    haze correlates well with the concentration of carbon monoxide.  The
    District has instituted a voluntary "no burn" program for those days when
    the pollution index is unhealthy due to CO.
         Air toxic regulations have been proposed to be incorporated with New
    Source Review.  A public hearing was scheduled for March 1987.  BACT or LAER
    is already required for all new sources emitting particles or VOC.  The
    District proposes that for 32 additional chemical substances, which are
    classed as inorganic gases, BACT will  be required for new sources.
         Limits on ambient air increases (increments) for asbestos, ammonia,
    chlorides, nitrates, and sulfates are also proposed.  The asbestos limit
    corresponds to the analytical limit of detection.  The other limits
    correspond to levels associated with visibility impairment.
    
                                        11-4
    

    -------
    IH •
    0 8~
    S33
    J 82
    *J M
    VI -
    W -H <
    x 363
    85|~
    M VI
    -IDC
    - _ (tOO
    CO 3 5 «
    S3 3 M
    ___ Sou
    *~" < 84
    uj f-. oo "S ° g
    O) U « -4
    2-* J 83
    2 . 3-Sx1
    zo 38 S!
    _ _| M ft
    >-
    «/) «t
    QC Z
    LjlJ **•••*
    0
    z z c
    B
    O |B^ C! **
    I— -i 5 9
    u_=> Si3
    O — I S « >.
    	 1 BUD
    UJO * 05
    OQ. -jg^
    uj of * g «
    05 1° a
    •— • «t 4J 0 •
    CJ VI t» >
    Z ^ « *
    *^~ M n
    ~g M
    _iS •*
    «f ~>
    c
    Z 1—
    1. 1 n
    Q= -SS^
    ^° « ?8 S
    <^ •» M vjtl
    a? uj 3 • n. «
    ^ *** ft- A
    « _j g e »
    h- — i J J; o <
    to < 3 s ^ w
    ^^ J! S3 S-
    -i ft. X o
    •-) M
    . -X M W
    M 58^
    •^•1 1*4 ft
    i *
    i— i
    »M
    UJ
    .J
    GO
    n "O o o co -*
    O O O r-t O O O
    
    
    
    
    «H
    O
    V
    >O CN -4 O
    .0
    o o o o ** d
    r- e* 5
    O O O • O -4 .C
    *J U *J 0 *J -4 4J
    0 O 0 O «j «
    f-l
    
    
    
    "s "s
    n M
    u u
    rH A J3 
    o on »-4
    O O tO 
    t-4
    
    
    
    
    ^^
    VI
    U
    IH
    a.
    VI
    •
    ^i
    o «
    -4 C
    U V
    u -I e
    « X -5
    0. V X -1
    T) 4J 14
    C (y « 0
    O A O *H
    S -4 « « MX
    3 H
    11-5
    

    -------
    11.4 RESOURCE REQUIREMENTS
    
         The Clark County analysis was done by the Air Pollution  Control
    Division staff members with engineering and chemistry backgrounds.   The work
    requiring toxicological expertise (e.g.,  development of unit  cancer risk
    factors) was done by EPA and presented in the EPA report used by Clark
    County.  The analysis performed by the Division took about two person-weeks
    and did not require any special computer resources.
    
    11.5 ADVICE TO OTHER AGENCIES
    
         The main advice the Division stressed to other agencies  is the
    importance of using all available air quality studies to assess the impact
    of toxic emissions.  For instance, the Division used data from a number of
    studies including studies on particulate matter and benzene emissions.  The
    Division noted that since the unit cancer risk factors developed by CAG and
    listed in the EPA report are conservative estimates, it was not necessary
    that emission estimates be highly precise.  Combining the information in the
    EPA report with existing Clark County data was easy to do in-house because
    it required no new research and was of sufficient accuracy.
         For more information, please contact Michael Naylor, Clark County
    Health District, Air Pollution Control Division, at (702) 383-1276.
                                        11-6
    

    -------
                                      GLOSSARY
    
    adenoma;  a benign tumor of a glandular structure or glandular origin.
    
    aneuploidv:  the condition in which the chromosome number is not an exact
    multiple of the usual haploid number.
    
    benign tumor;  not malignant; remaining localized in the territory in which
    it arises.
    
    bioassav;  a test in living organisms.  As used in this report, a test for
    carcinogenicity in laboratory animals, generally rats and mice, which
    include a near-lifelong exposure to the agent under test.
    
    cancer;  a group of diseases characterized by uncontrolled growth of body
    cells leading to formation of malignant tumors that tend to grow rapidly and
    spread.
    
    carcinogen:  an agent capable of inducing a cancer response.
    
    carcinoma:  a malignant tumor of epithelial origin (skin, lung, breast).
    
    case-control studv:  an epidemiological study in which individuals with the
    disease under study  (cases) are compared to individuals without the disease
    (controls).
    
    chi-sauare test:  a test for significant differences between a binomial
    population and a multinomial population, where each observation may fall
    into one of several classes.  The test furnishes a comparison among several
    samples instead of just two.
                                        G-l
    

    -------
    cohort study;  an epidemiological  study in which  a  group  of  people,  a
    cohort, is studied over time after exposure to a  substance or  a  personal
    attribute or behavior.   The group  is considered initially free of the
    disease under study.
    
    confidence limit;  an endpoint of  a confidence interval.  Confidence
    interval is that interval which has a specified probability  of containing  a
    given parameter or characteristic.
    
    diploid;  having two sets of chromosomes as found in somatic cells.
    
    dose-response curve;  the graphic  presentation of the relationship between
    the amount of an agent either administered, absorbed, or  believed to be
    effective and the response of the  biological system to that  agent.  Dose is
    plotted on the x-axis and response on the y-axis.
    
    electrophilic (substance);  that which accepts an electron  pair  from another
    molecule.
    
    epidemiology;  the study of the incidence, distribution and  control  of a
    disease within a population.
    
    eoiqenetic carcinogen;  a carcinogen that does not directly involve
    interaction with DMA.
    
    foci;  the starting point of a disease process.
    
    genetic carcinogen;  a substance which exerts its carcinogenic action
    through interaction with or affecting of genetic material (DNA).
    
    genome;  one haploid set of chromosomes with the genes they contain.
    
    goodness-of-fit;  the degree to which the observed frequencies of occurrence
    of events in an experiment correspond to the probabilities  in a model of  the
    experiment.
    
                                        G-2
    

    -------
    haploid:  possessing half the diploid or normal  number  of  chromosomes  found
    in somatic or body cells.
    
    hemangiosarcoma:  a malignant tumor composed of anaplastic endothelial
    cells.
    
    histoqenic origin:  the germ cell  layer of the embryo from which  the adult
    tissue developed.
    
    human equivalent dose;  the human dose of an agent which is believed to
    induce the same magnitude of toxic effect that the known animal dose has
    induced.
    
    hvdrophilic:  of, relating to, or having a strong affinity for water.
    
    hvperplasia:  an abnormal or unusual increase in the elements composing a
    part (as tissue cells).
    
    immune system;  the apparatus by which a living organism resists  and
    overcomes disease.
    
    initiator;  an agent with the ability to induce a change in a tissue which
    leads to the induction of tumors after a second agent,  called a  promoter, is
    administered to the tissue repeatedly.
    
    leukemia;  any of several of the diseases of the hematopoietic system
    characterized by the uncontrolled proliferation of leukocytes.
    
    linearized multistage model procedure;  a sequence of steps in which the
    multistage model is fit to the tumor incidence data; the maximum linear term
    consistent with the data is calculated; the low dose of the dose-response
    function equated to the coefficient of the maximum linear term;  the slope is
    equated to the upper bound of potency.
                                        G-3
    

    -------
    llpoDhilic:  having an affinity for fats.
    
    lymphoma;  any neoplasm,  usually malignant,  of the  lymphoid  tissues.
    
    malignant tumor:  a tumor that has invaded neighboring  tissue  and/or
    undergone metastasis to distant body sites,  at which  point the tumor  is
    called a cancer and is beyond the reach of local  surgery.
    
    maximum likelihood estimate:  estimate of a value obtained using a
    statistical technique where the likelihood distribution is maximized
    (finding the largest value of a function is maximizing  it).
    
    metaplasia;  conversion of one kind of tissue into  a  form which is not
    normal for that tissue.
    
    metastasis:  movement of body cells (e.g., cancer cells) from one part of
    the body to another.
    
    metastasize:  to invade by metastasis.
    
    mutagen;  a chemical or physical agent that interacts with  DNA to cause a
    permanent, transmissible change in the genetic material of a cell.
    
    mutation;  an abrupt change  in the genotype of an organism,  not resulting
    from recombination; genetic material may undergo alteration or
    rearrangement.
    
    neoplasm:  a new growth of tissue in which growth is uncontrolled and
    progressive; a tumor.
    
    95 percent upper confidence  limit:  confidence limit which states that the
    value in question has a 5 percent probability of exceeding the true value.
    
    nucleophilic:  having an affinity for atomic nuclei,  electron-donating.
                                        G-4
    

    -------
    oncogene:  naturally occurring genes that code for factors  that  regulate
    cell growth.
    
    oharmacokinetlcs:  quantitative study of the metabolic processes of
    absorption, distribution, biotransformation, and elimination.
    
    promoter:  agent that has very weak or no carcinogenicity by itself,  but
    enhances carcinogenic response when applied after a dose of an initiator.
    
    g,:  the 95 percent upper limit of the risk estimate;  the upper bound slope
    parameter as determined by the multistage procedure.
    
    sarcoma:  a malignant tumor arising in connective tissue and composed
    primarily of anaplastic cells that resemble those of supportive tissues.
    
    sister chromatid exchange:  an exchange at one locus between the paired
    strands of a chromosome which does not result in an alteration of overall
    chromosome morphology.  The observation of sister chromatid exchanges
    induced by chemicals is one of the quickest, easiest,  and most sensitive
    tests for genetic damage.
    
    squamous cell carcinoma:  a carcinoma composed of anaplastic squamous
    epithelial cells.
    
    squamous metaplasia:  transformation to a squamous form.
    
    standards mortality odds ratio:  compares the number of deaths from the
    cause at interest to the number of deaths from auxiliary causes  in the
    exposed population  (the odds) to the expected odds derived  from  a
    comparison population.
    
    statistical power:  the probability of not overlooking an excess risk.
    
    threshold:  the minimum level of a stimulus that will evoke a response.
                                        G-5
    

    -------
    translocation:  the transfer of a chromosome segment from its  usual  position
    to a new position in the same or different chromosome.
    
    unit cancer risk factor:  the incremental  upper bound lifetime risk
    estimated to result from a lifetime exposure to an agent if it is in the air
    at a concentration of 1 ug/m  or in the water at a concentration of 1 ug/1.
                                        G-6
    

    -------
                                     REFERENCES
    
    
    Anderson, E. L. and Carcinogen Assessment Group.   Quantitative Approaches in
    Use to Assess Cancer Risk.  Risk Anal. 3:277-295.   1983.
    
    Armitage, P. and R. Doll.  Stochastic Models for Carcinogenesis.  (In)
    L. Lecam and J. Neyman, eds.  Proceedings of the Fourth Berkeley Symposium
    on Mathematical Statistics and Probability.  University of California Press.
    4:19-38.  1961.
    
    Beaumont, James J. and Norman E. Breslow.  Power Considerations in
    Epidemiologic Studies of Vinyl Chloride Workers.  American Journal of
    Epidemiology.  Vol. 114, No. 5.  1981.
    
    Becker, F. F.  Recent Concepts of Initiation and Promotion in
    Carcinogenesis.  American Journal of Pathology.  105:3-9.  1981.
    
    Brown, C. C. et al.  Models for Carcinogenic Risk Assessment.  Science.
    202:1105.  1978.
    
    Brown, Charles C.  High Dose to Low Dose Extrapolation in Animals.
    Presented at the American Chemical Socity Symposium on Assessing Health
    Risks from Chemicals.  Kansas City, Kansas.  September 1982.
    
    California Air Resources Board and California Department of Health Services.
    Report to the Scientific Review Panel on Benzene.  Sacramento, California.
    November 1984.
    
    California Air Resources Board and California Department of Health Services.
    Report on Ethylene Dibromide to the Scientific Review Panel.  Sacramento,
    California.  April 1985.
    
    California Department of Health Services.  Guidelines for Chemical
    Carcinogen Risk Assessments and Their Scientific Rationale.  Sacramento,
    California.  November 1985.
    
    California Air Resources Board.  Staff Report:  Initial Statement of Reasons
    for Proposed Rulemaking - Public Hearing to Consider the Adoption of a
    Regulatory Amendment Identify!nng Chromium as a Toxic Air Contaminant.
    Sacramento, California.  December 1985.
    
    California Air Resources Board.  Staff Report:  Proposed Benzene Control
    Plan.  Sacramento, California.  May 1986b.
    
    California Air Resources Board.  Staff Report:  Initial Statement of Reasons
    for Proposed Rulemaking - Public Hearing to Consider the Adoption of a
    Regulatory Amendment Identifying Cadmium as a Toxic Air Contaminant.
    Sacramento, California.  December 1986a.
                                        R-l
    

    -------
    Crump, K. S.,  H. A. Guess, and L.  L.  Deal.   Confidence Intervals and Test
    of Hypotheses Concerning Dose-Response Relations Inferred from Animal
    Carcinogenicity Data.  Biometrics.   33:437-451.   1977.
    
    Davis, Dervra Lee, Barbara Mandula, and John Van Ryzin.  Assessing the Power
    and Quality of Epidemiologic Studies of Asbestos - Exposed Populations.
    Toxicology and Industrial Health.  Vol. 1,  No.  4.  1985.
    
    Doll, R.  Weibull Distribution of Cancer.  Implications for Models of
    Carcinogenesis.  J. R. Stat. Soc.  A13:133-166.   1971.
    
    Engineering-Science.  Volumes 1 and 2:  Air Toxics Source Assessment Manual
    for California Air Pollution Control Districts (Public Review Draft).
    Berkeley, California.  October 8, 1986.
    
    Farber, E. and R. Cameron.  The Sequential  Analysis of Cancer Development.
    Adv. Cancer Res.  31:125-226.  1980.
    
    Farber, E.  Sequential Events in Chemical Carcinogenesis.  (In) Cancer:  A
    Comprehensive Treatise, 2nd Edition.  Volume 1 Etiology:  Chemical and
    Physical Carcinogenesis.  F. F. Becker, ed.  Plenum Press, New York.  1982.
    
    Hayes, A. W. (editor)  Principles and Methods of Toxicology.  Raven  Press,
    New York.  1982.
    
    International Agency for Research on Cancer.  IARC Monographs on the
    Evaluation of the Carcinogenic Risk of Chemicals to Humans.  Volumes  1 and
    2, Supplement 4.  World Health Organization.  Lyon, France.  October  1982.
    
    International Agency for Research on Cancer.  IARC Monographs on the
    Evaluation of the Carcinogenic Risk of Chemicals to Humans.  Volume  34.
    Lyon, France.  June  1984.
    
    Kellam, Robert G.  Memorandum to Robert E. Rosensteel.  Results of Exposure
    and Cancer Risk Analyses for EDC Production Facilities.  November 28, 1986.
    
    Klassen, C. D., M. 0. Amdur, and J. Doull.  Casareth and Doull's Toxicology;
    The Basic Science of Poisons.  Third Edition.  MacMillian Publishing
    Company, New York.   1986.
    
    Krewski, D. and C. Brown.  Carcinogenic Risk Assessment:  A Guide to the
    Literature.  Biometrics 37, 353-366.  June 1, 1981.
    
    MacMahon, B. and T.  Pugh.  Epidemiology Principles and  Methods.  Little,
    Brown, and Company.  Boston, Massachusetts.  1970.
    
    McGaughy, Robert E.  Appendix B:  EPA Approach for Assessing the Risk of
    Environmental Carcinogens.  Draft.  Carcinogen Assessment Group.  U.  S.
    Environmental. Protection Agency.  Washington, D.C.  1986.
                                        R-2
    

    -------
    Michigan Department of Natural Resources.  Staff Activity Report - Permit to
    Install Application No. 451-85.  MDNR, Air Quality Division.   Lansing,
    Michigan.  March 18, 1986.
    
    National Air Toxics Information Clearinghouse.  National Air Toxics
    Information Clearinghouse Newsletter.  U. S. Environmental Protection
    Agency.  Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards.  Research
    Triangle Park, North Carolina.  December 1984.
    
    National Air Toxics Information Clearinghouse.  National Air Toxics
    Information Clearinghouse Newsletter.  U. S. Environmental Protection
    Agency.  Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards.  Research
    Triangle Park, North Carolina.  December 1985.
    
    National Air Toxics Information Clearinghouse.  Methods for Pollutant
    Selection and Prioritization.  U. S. Environmental Protection Agency.
    Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards.  Research Triangle Park, North
    Carolina.  July 1986a.
    
    National Air Toxics Information Clearinghouse.  NATICH Data Base Report on
    State and Local Agency Air Toxics Activities.  Volume 1.  Office of Air
    Quality Planning and Standards.  U. S. Environmental Protection Agency.
    Research Triangle Park, North Carolina.  July 1986b.
    
    National Research Council.  Risk Assessment in the Federal Government:
    Managing the Process.  Committee on the  Institutional Means for Assessment
    of Risks to Public Health.  National Research Council.  Washington, D.C.
    1983.
    
    National Research Council, Safe Drinking Water Committee.  Drinking Water
    and Health.  Volume 1.  National Academy Press.  Washington, D.C.  1977.
    
    National Research Council, Safe Drinking Water Committee.  Drinking Water
    and Health.  Volume 3.  National Academy Press.  Washingotn, D.C.  1980.
    
    National Research Council, Safe Drinking Water Committee.  Drinking Water
    and Health.  Volume 6.  National Academy Press.  Washington, D.C.  1986.
    
    Naylor, M. H.  Personal Communication with Alice Pelland, Radian      	
    Corporation.  February 1987.
    
    Northeast States of Coordinated Air Use Management  (NESCAUM).  NESCAUM
    Regional Health Evaluation Document for Tetrachloroethylene.  NESCAUM Air
    Toxics Committee.  Boston, Massachusetts.   1986.
    
    Office of Pesticides and Toxic Substances  (OPTS).  GAMS User's Guide -
    Incomplete Draft.  U. S. Environmental Protection Agency.  Washington, D.C.
    August 1985.
    
    Office of Pesticides and Toxic Substances  (OPTS).  Draft  Graphical Exposure
    Modeling System (GEMS) User's Guide.  Volume  1, Core Manual.  U.  S.
    Environmental Protection Agency.  Washington, D.C.  April 24, 1986.
    
    
                                        R-3
    

    -------
    Office of Science and Technology Policy (OSTP),  Executive Office of the
    President.  Chemical Carcinogens; A Review of the Science and Its Associated
    Principles.  February 1985.  Washington,  D.C.  50 JFR 10372.   March 14,  1985.
    
    Office of.Technology Assessment (OTA).   Assessment of Technologies for
    Determining Cancer Risks from the Environment.  Congress of the United
    States.  Washington, D.C.  June 1981.
    
    Park, C. N. and R. D. Snee.  Quantitative Risk Assessment:  State-of-the-Art
    for Carcinogenesis.  1983.
    
    Pike, M. C.  A Method of Analysis of a Certain Class of Experiments in
    Carcinogenesis.  Biometrics.  22:142-162.  1966.
    
    Simon, C. A.  Risk Assessment for 3-Chloro-2-Methylpropene.   Memorandum to
    file.  Michigan Department of Natural  Resources.  Lansing, Michigan.
    September 25, 1986.
    
    Simon, C. A.  Personal Communication with Alice Pelland, Radian Corporation.
    January 6, 1987a.
    
    Simon, C. A.  Personal Communication with Alice Pelland, Radian Corporation.
    February  17, 1987b.
    
    Slaga, T. J., A. J. P. Klein-Szanto, S. M. Fischer, C. E. Weeks, K. Nelson,
    and S. Major.  Studies on Mechanism of Action of Anti-Tumor-Promoting
    Agents:   Their Specificity in Two-Stage Promotion.  Proceedings of the
    National  Academy of Science.  USA.  77:2251-2254.  1980.
    
    U. S. Environmental Protection Agency.  Air Quality Criteria for Particulate
    Matter and Sulfur Oxides  - Volume III.  EPA 600/8-82-029c.  Office of Health
    and Environmental Assessment, Environmental Criteria and Assessment Office.
    Research  Triangle Park, North Carolina.  1982.
    
    U. S. Environmental Protection Agency.  Health Assessment Document for
    Acrylonitrile.  Final Report.  EPA 600/8-82-007f.  Office of Health and
    Environmental Assessment.  Research Triangle  Park, North  Carolina.  1983.
    
    U. S. Environmental Protection Agency.  Risk  Assessment  and Management:
    Framework for Decision Making.   EPA 600/9-85-002.  December  1984a.
    
    U. S. Environmental Protection Agency.  Health Assessment Document  for
    Epichlorohydrin,  Final Report.   EPA 600/8-83-032f.  Office of  Health and
    Environmental Assessment.  Research Triangle  Park, North  Carolina.  1984b.
    
    U. S. Environmental Protection Agency.  The  Magnitude  and Nature  of the Air
    Toxics Problem in the United States, Draft Report.  Office of  Air  and
    Radiation.  Washington,  D.C.   1984c.
    
    U. S. Environmental Protection Agency.  Health Assessment Document  for
    Nickel.   EPA 600/8-83-012f.  Office of Health and  Environmental  Assessment.
    Research  Triangle Park,  North Carolina.   1985a.
    
    
                                        R-4
    

    -------
    U. S. Environmental Protection Agency.  Mutagenicity and Carcinogenicity
    Assessment of 1,3-Butadiene.  EPA 600/8-85-004f.   Office of Health and
    Environmental Assessment.  Washington, D.C.  September 1985b.
    
    U. S. Environmental Protection Agency.  Final Health Assessment Document for
    Tetrachloroethylene (Perchloroethylene).  EPA 600/8-82-005b.  Office of
    Health and Environmental Assessment.  Washington, D.C.  1985c.
    
    U. S. Environmental Protection Agency.  Health Assessment Document for
    Dichloromethane.  EPA 600/8-82-004f.  Office of Health and Environmental
    Assessment.  Research Triangle Park, North Carolina.  February 1985d.
    
    U. S. Environmental Protection Agency.  User's Manual for the Human Exposure
    Model.  Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards.  Research Triangle
    Park, North Carolina.  1986a.
    
    U. S. Environmental Protection Agency.  Guidelines for Carcinogen Risk
    Assessment.  Carcinogen Assessment Group, Office of Health and Environmental
    Assessment.  Washington, D.C.  51 JF.R 33992.  September 24, 1986b.
    
    U. S. Environmental Protection Agency.  Guidelines for the Health Risk
    Assessment of Chemical Mixtures.  Environment of Criteria and Assessment
    Office.  Cincinnati, Ohio.  51 FR 34014.  September 24, 1986c.
    
    U. S. Environmental Protection Agency.  Guidelines for Estimating Exposures.
    Exposure Assessment Group, Office of Health and Environmental Assessment.
    Washington, D.C.  51 £E 34042.  September 24, 1986d.
    
    U. S. Environmental Protection Agency.  Air Quality Criteria for Ozone  and
    Other Photochemical Oxidants.  EPA 600/8-84-020DF.  Office of Health and
    Environmental Assessment, Environmental Criteria and Assessment Office.
    Research Triangle Park, North Carolina.  1986e.
    
    U. S. Environmental Protection Agency.  Interim Procedures for Estimating
    Risks Associated with Exposure to Mixtures of Chlorinated Dibenzo-p-Dioxins
    and Dibenzofurans (CDDs and CDFs).  EPA 625/3-87-012.  March 1987.
    
    U. S. Environmental Protection Agency.  Memorandum from S. Bayard  (CAG) to
    J. Blancato (EAG) through W. Farland  (CAG).  13 pp.  Undated.
    
    Weinstein, I. B., S. Gattoni-Celli, P. Kirschmeier, M. Lambert, W. Hsiao,
    J. Backer, and A. Jeffrey.  Multistage Carcinogenesis  Involves Multiple
    Genes and Multiple Mechanisms.  Pp. 229-237  in A. J. Levine, G. F. Vande
    Woude, W. C. Topp, and J. D. Watson, eds.  Cancer Cells.  1.  The
    Transformed Phenotype.  Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory.  Cold Spring Harbor,
    New York.  1984.
    
    Weinstein, I. B.  The Relevance of Tumor Promotion and Multistage
    Carcinogenesis to Risk Assessment.  (In)  Banbury Report  19:  Risk
    Quantitation and Regulatory Policy.  D. G. Hoel, R. A. Merrill, and
    F. P. Perera, eds.  Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory.  Cold  Spring Harbor,
    New York.  1985.
                                        R-5
    

    -------
    Whittemore, A. and J. B. Keller.  Quantitative Theories of Carcinogenesis.
    SAIAM Review.  20(1):1-30.  1978.
    
    Wurzel, K. A., 6. L. Avery, and D. J. Brandt.  Technical Methods for
    Determining if the Emission of a Non-Criteria Pollutant May Cause Injurious
    Effect to Human Health or Safety.  Michigan Department of Natural Resources.
    Air Quality Division.  Lansing, Michigan.  January 1984.
                                         R-6
    

    -------
                     APPENDIX A
    EPA GUIDELINES FOR CARCINOGEN RISK ASSESSMENT
    

    -------
                     51FR 33992
    
    GUIDELINES FOR CARCINOGEN  RISK
    ASSESSMENT
    
    SUMMARY:On September 24, 1986, the U.S.
    Environmental Protection Agency issued the
    following five guidelines for assessing the health
    risks of environmental pollutants.
    
        Guidelines for Carcinogen Risk Assessment
    
        Guidelines for Estimating Exposures
    
        Guidelines for Mutagenicity Risk Assessment
    
        Guidelines for the Health Assessment of Suspect
        Developmental Toxicants
    
        Guidelines for the Health  Risk  Assessment  of
        Chemical Mixtures
    
    This section contains the Guidelines for Carcinogen
    Risk Assessment
    
        The Guidelines for Carcinogen Risk Assessment
    (hereafter  "Guidelines") are intended to guide
    Agency evaluation of suspect carcinogens in line
    with the policies and procedures established in the
    statutes administered by the EPA. These Guidelines
    were developed as part of an interoffice guidelines
    development program  under  the auspices of the
    Office of Health and Environmental Assessment
    (OHEA)  in the Agency's Office of Research and
    Development. They reflect Agency consideration of
    public and Science Advisory Board (SAB) comments
    on  the Proposed Guidelines for Carcinogen Risk
    Assessment published November 23, 1984 (49 FR
    46294).
    
        This publication completes the first round of risk
    assessment  guidelines  development.  These
    Guidelines  will be revised, and new guidelines will
    be developed, as appropriate.
    
    FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CONTACT:
    
    Dr. Robert E. McGaughy
    Carcinogen Assessment Group
    Office of Health and Environmental Assessment
    (RD-689)
    401 M Street, S.W.
    Washington, DC 20460
    202-382-5898
    
    SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION:  In 1983,
    the National Academy of Sciences (NAS) published
    its book entitled Risk Attettment in the  Federal
    Government: Managing the Protest. In that book,
    the NAS recommended that  Federal regulatory
    agencies establish "inference guidelines" to ensure
    consistency and technical  quality in  risk
    assessments and to ensure that the risk assessment
    process was  maintained as a scientific effort
    separate from risk management A task force within^
    EPA accepted that recommendation and requested"
    that Agency scientists begin to develop  such
    guidelines.
    
    General
    
        The guidelines  are products of a two-year
    Agencywide  effort, which has included many
    scientists from the  larger scientific community.
    These guidelines set forth principles and procedures
    to guide EPA scientists in the conduct of Agency risk
    assessments, and to inform Agency decision makers
    and the public about these procedures. In particular,
    the guidelines emphasize that risk assessments will
    be conducted on a case-by-case basis, giving full
    consideration to all relevant scientific information.
    This case-by-case approach means  that Agency
    experts review the scientific information on each
    agent and use the most scientifically appropriate
    interpretation to assess risk. The guidelines also
    stress that this information will be fully presented
    in Agency  risk assessment documents, and that
    'Agency scientists will identify the strengths and
    weaknesses  of each assessment by describing
    uncertainties, assumptions, and limitations, as well
    as  the scientific basis and rationale for each
    assessment
    
        Finally, the guidelines are formulated in part to
    bridge gaps in risk  assessment methodology and
    data. By identifying  these gaps and the importance
    of the missing information to the risk assessment
    process, EPA wishes to encourage research and
    analysis that will lead to new risk assessment
    methods and data.
    
    Guidelines for Carcinogen Risk Assessment
    
        Work on  the Guidelines for Carcinogen Risk
    Assessment began in  January 1984.  Draft
    guidelines were developed by Agency work groups
    composed of expert scientists from throughout the
    Agency. The  drafts were peer-reviewed by expert
    scientists in the field of carcinogenesis  from
    universities, environmental groups, industry,  labor,
    and other governmental agencies. They were then
    proposed for public comment  in the FEDERAL
    REGISTER (49 FR 46294). On November 9, 1984,
    the Administrator directed that Agency offices use
    the proposed guidelines in performing  risk
    assessments until final guidelines become available.
                                                 A-l
    

    -------
        After the close of the public comment period,
    Agency staff prepared summaries of the comments,
    analyses of the major issues presented by the
    commentors, and proposed changes in the language
    of the guidelines to deal with the issues raised.
    These analyses were presented to review panels of
    the SAB on March 4 and April 22-23, 1985, and to
    the Executive Committee of the SAB on April 25-26,
    1985. The SAB meetings were announced in the
    FEDERAL REGISTER  as follows: February  12,
    1985 (50 PR 5811) and April 4, 1985 (50 PR 13420
    and 13421).
    
        In a letter to the Administrator dated June 19,
    1985, the Executive Committee generally concurred
    on  all five of the guidelines, but recommended
    certain revisions, and requested that any  revised
    guidelines be  submitted to the appropriate SAB
    review panel chairman for review and  concurrence
    on behalf of the Executive Committee. As described
    in the responses to comments (see Part  B: Response
    to  the Public and  Science Advisory Board
    Comments),  each guidelines document was  revised,
    where  appropriate,  consistent  with the SAB
    recommendations, and revised draft guidelines were
    submitted to the panel  chairmen. Revised draft
    Guidelines for Carcinogen Risk Assessment were
    concurred on in a  letter dated February  7, 1986.
    Copies of the letters are available at the Public
    Information Reference Unit,  EPA Headquarters
    Library, as indicated elsewhere in this section.
    
        Following this Preamble are two parts: Part A
    contains the  Guidelines and Part B, the Response to
    the Public and Science Advisory Board Comments (a
    summary of the major public comments, SAB
    comments,  and Agency  responses to those
    comments).
    
        The Agency is continuing to study the risk
    assessment issues raised in the guidelines and will
    revise these Guidelines in line with new information
    as appropriate.
        References,  supporting documents, and
    comments received on  the proposed guidelines,  as
    well as copies of the final guidelines, are available
    for inspection and copying at the Public Information
    Reference Unit (202-382-5926), EPA Headquarters
    Library, 401 M Street, S.W., Washington,  DC,
    between the hours of 8:00 a.m. and 4:30 p.m.
    
        I  certify  that these Guidelines are not major
    rules as defined by Executive Order 12291, because
    they are nonbinding policy statements  and  have no
    direct effect on the regulated community. Therefore,
    they will have no effect on costs or prices, and they
    will
                      [51 FR 33993]
                                     have no other
    significant adverse effects on  the economy. These
    Guidelines  were reviewed  by the Office  of
    Management and Budget under Executive Order
    12291.
    
    
    August 22,1986
    
    Lee M. Thomas,
    
    Administrator
    
    CONTENTS
    
    Part A; Guidelines for Carcinogen Rink Assessment
    
    I. Introduction
    
    llJiatard Idtntification
    
      A. Overview
      B. Element* of Hazard Identification
         1. Physical-Chemical Properties and Routes and
           Patterns of Exposure
         2. Structure-Activity Relationships
         3. Metabolic and Pharmacokinetic Properties
         4. Toxicologic Effect*
         5. Short-Term Testa
         6. Long-Term Animal Studies
         7. Human Studies
      C. Weight of Evidence
      0. Guidance for Dose-Response Assessment
      E. Summary and Conclusion
    
    IU.Dou-Rt*pon»e AtMttment, Expoturt Attutmtnt, ondRitk
        Cnarocttraatun
    
      ADose-Response Assessment
         1. Selection of Data
         2. Choice of Mathematical Extrapolation
           Modal
         3. Equivalent Exposure Unite Among Species
      B. Exposure Assessment
      C. Risk Characterization
         1. Options for Numerical Risk Estimates
         2. Concurrent Exposure
         3. Summary of Risk Characterization
    
    IV. SPA Clarification Sytttm for Catagoriting Wtight of
        ttuidtnet for  Careinogtnieity from Human and Animal
        Studitt (Adapttd from IARC)
    
      A. Assessment of Weight of Evidence for Carcinogenicity from
         Studies in Humans
      B. Assessment of Weight of Evidence for Carcinogenicity from
         Studies in Experimental Animals
      C. Categorization of  Overall Weight of Evidence for Human
         Careinogenicity
    
    VJReferences
    
    Part B: Response to Public  and Science Advisory Board
    Coauaente
    
    1. Introduction
    
    II. Office of Science and Technology Policy Report on
     Chemical Carcinogen*
    
    III. Inference Guideline*
    
    TV. Bualuation of Benign Tumors
    
    V. Tnuuplacental and Uultigenerational Animal Bioattayt
    
    VI. Maximum ToUnttd  DOM
    
    VII. Mouse Liner Tumors
    
    Vin.Weignt-of-Saidence Categoric*
    
    XI. Quantitative Sttimattt of Risk
                                                     A-2
    

    -------
     Part  A: Guidelines  for Carcinogen  Risk
     Assessment
    
     /. Introduction
        This is the first revision of the 1976 Interim
     Procedures and  Guidelines for Health Risk
     Assessments of Suspected Carcinogens (U.S. EPA,
     1976;  Albert et al., 1977). The  impetus for this
     revision is the need to  incorporate into these1
     Guidelines  the concepts and approaches  td
     carcinogen  risk  assessment that have been
     developed during the last ten years. The purpose of
     these  Guidelines is to promote quality and
     consistency of carcinogen  risk  assessments within
     the EPA and to inform those outside the EPA about
     its approach to carcinogen risk assessment These
     Guidelines emphasize  the broad but essential
     aspects of risk assessment that are needed  by
     experts in  the  various disciplines required (e.g.,
     toxicology, pathology, pharmacology, and statistics)
     for carcinogen risk assessment Guidance is given in
     general terms since the science of carcinogenesis is
     in a state of rapid advancement, and overly specific
     approaches may rapidly become obsolete.
    
        These Guidelines  describe the  general
     framework to be followed in developing an analysis
     of carcinogenic risk and some salient principles to be
     used in  evaluating  the quality of data  and in
     formulating judgments concerning the nature and
     magnitude of  the cancer hazard from  suspect
     carcinogens. It  is the intent of these Guidelines to
     permit sufficient flexibility to accommodate new
     knowledge and new assessment  methods as they
     emerge. It is also recognized that there is a need  for
     new methodology that has not been addressed in this
     document  in  a  number of areas,  e.g., the
     characterization of uncertainty. As this knowledge
     and assessment methodology are developed, these
     Guidelines will be revised whenever appropriate.
    
       A summary of the current state of knowledge in
     the field of carcinogenesis and a statement of broad
     scientific principles of carcinogen risk assessment,
     which  was developed by the Office  of Science and
    Technology Policy (OSTP, 1985), forms an important
    basis for these Guidelines; the  format of these
    Guidelines is  similar  to that proposed  by the
    National Research Council (NRC) of the National
    Academy of Sciences in a book  entitled Risk
    Assessment in the  Federal Government: Managing
    the Process (NRC, 1983).
    
       These Guidelines are to be  used within the
    policy  framework already provided by applicable
    EPA statutes and do not alter such policies. These
    Guidelines provide general directions for analyzing
    and organizing  available data.  They do not imply
    that one kind of data or  another is prerequisite  for
    regulatory action to control, prohibit, or allow the
    use of a carcinogen.
       Regulatory decision  making involves  two
    components: risk assessment and risk management
    Risk assessment defines the adverse  health
    consequences of exposure to toxic agents. The risk
    assessments will be carried out independently from
    considerations  of the consequences of regulatory
    action. Risk  management combines  the risk
    assessment with the directives  of  regulatory
    legislation, together with socioeconomic,  technical,
    political, and  other considerations,  to reach a
    decision as to whether or how much to control future
    exposure to the suspected toxic agents.
    
       Risk assessment includes one or more of the
    following components: hazard identification, dose-
    response assessment, exposure assessment, and risk
    characterization (NRC, 1983).
    
       Hazard identification is  a qualitative  risk
    assessment, dealing with the process of determining
    whether exposure to an agent has the potential  to
    increase the incidence of cancer. For  purposes  of
    these Guidelines, both malignant  and  benign
    tumors  are  used  in  the evaluation  of the
    carcinogenic hazard. The hazard identification
    component qualitatively answers the question  of
    how likely an agent is to be a human carcinogen.
    
       Traditionally, quantitative risk assessment has
    been used as an inclusive term to describe all  or
    parts of dose-response  assessment,  exposure
    assessment, and risk characterization. Quantitative
    risk assessment can be a useful general term  in
    some circumstances, but the more explicit
    terminology developed by the NRC (1983) is usually
    preferred. The dose-response assessment defines the
    relationship between the dose of an agent  and the
    probability of induction of a carcinogenic effect This
    component usually entails an extrapolation from the
    generally high doses administered to experimental
    animals or exposures noted in epidemiologic studies
    to the exposure levels expected from human contact
    with the agent in the environment; it also includes
    considerations  of the  validity  of  these
    extrapolations.
    
       The exposure assessment identifies populations
    exposed to the agent, describes their composition
    and size, and presents the types, magnitudes,
    frequencies, and durations of exposure to the agent
                     [51 PR 339941
       In risk  characterization,  the results of the
    exposure assessment and the dose-response
    assessment are combined to estimate quantitatively
    the  carcinogenic  risk. As  part  of  risk
    characterization, a summary of the strengths and
    weaknesses in the hazard identification, dose-
    response assessment, exposure assessment, and the
    public health risk estimates- are presented. Major
    assumptions, scientific judgments, and, to the extent
    possible, estimates of the uncertainties embodied in
    the assessment are also presented, distinguishing
    clearly between fact, assumption, and science policy.
                                                  A-3
    

    -------
        The National Research  Council (NRC, 1983)
    pointed out that  there are  many questions
    encountered in the risk assessment process that are
    unanswerable given current scientific knowledge.
    To bridge the uncertainty that exists in these areas
    where there is  no scientific consensus, inferences
    must be made to ensure that progress continues in
    the assessment process. The OSTP (1985) reaffirmed
    this position, and generally left to  the regulatory
    agencies the job of  articulating these inferences.
    Accordingly, the Guidelines incorporate judgmental
    positions (science policies) based on evaluation of the
    presently  available information and on  the
    regulatory  mission of the Agency. The Guidelines
    are consistent with  the principles developed by the
    OSTP (1985), although in  many instances are
    necessarily more specific.
    //. Hazard Identification
    A. Overview
    
        The qualitative assessment or  hazard
    identification part of risk assessment contains a
    review of the relevant biological and chemical
    information bearing on whether or not an agent may
    pose a carcinogenic hazard. Since chemical  agents
    seldom occur  in a  pure state and  are often
    transformed in the body, the review should include
    available information on contaminants, degradation
    products, and metabolites.
    
        Studies are evaluated  according to  sound
    biological  and statistical  considerations  and
    procedures. These have been described in several
    publications (Interagency  Regulatory  Liaison
    Group, 1979; OSTP, 1985; Peto et al., 1980; Mantel,
    1980; Mantel and Haenszel, 1959; Interdisciplinary
    Panel on Carcinogenicity, 1984; National Center for
    Toxicological Research, 1981; National  Toxicology
    Program, 1984; U.S.  EPA,  1983a, 1983b,  1983c;
    Haseman,  1984).  Results and  conclusions
    concerning the agent, derived from different types of
    information, whether indicating positive or negative
    responses, are melded together into a weight-of-
    evidence determination. The strength of the
    evidence  supporting a  potential  human
    carcinogenicity judgment is developed in a weight-
    of-evidence stratification scheme.
    
    B. Elements of Hazard Identification
    
        Hazard identification should include a review of
    the following information to the extent that  it is
    available.
    
        1. Physical-Chemical Properties and Routes and
    Patterns of Exposure.  Parameters relevant to
    carcinogenesis,  including physical state, physical-
    chemical properties, and exposure pathways in the
    environment should be described where possible.
    
        2. Structure-Activity Relationships. This  section
    should summarize relevant structure-activity
    correlations that support or argue against the
    prediction of potential carcinogenicity.
    
       3. Metabolic and Pharmacokinetic Properties.
    This section should summarize relevant metabolic
    information. Information such as whether the agent
    is direct-acting or requires conversion to a reactive
    carcinogenic  (e.g., an electrophilic) species,
    metabolic pathways for such conversions,
    macromolecular interactions,  and  fate  (e.g.,
    transport, storage, and excretion), as well as species
    differences, should be discussed and critically
    evaluated. Pharmacokinetic properties  determine
    the biologically effective dose and may be relevant to
    hazard identification and other components of risk
    assessment.
    
       4. Toxico/ogic Effects.  Toxicologic effects other
    than carcinogenicity (e.g., suppression  of the
    immune  system, endocrine disturbances,  organ
    damage)  that are relevant to the evaluation of
    carcinogenicity should be summarized. Interactions
    with other chemicals or agents and with lifestyle
    factors should be discussed. Prechronic and chronic
    toxicity evaluations, as well as other  test results,
    may yield information on  target organ effects,
    pathophysiological  reactions,  and preneoplastic
    lesions  that  bear on  the  evaluation  of
    carcinogenicity. Dose-response and time-to-response
    analyses of these reactions may also be helpful.
    
       5. Snort-Term Tests. Tests for point mutations,
    numerical and structural  chromosome aberrations,
    DNA damage/repair, and in uitro transformation
    provide supportive evidence of carcinogenicity and
    may give information  on potential carcinogenic
    mechanisms. A range of tests from each of the above
    end points helps to characterize an agent's response
    spectrum.
    
       Short-term in uioo and in uitro tests that can
    give indication of initiation and promotion activity
    may  also provide supportive evidence for
    carcinogenicity. Lack of positive  results in short-
    term tests for  genetic toxicity  does not provide a
    basis for discounting positive results  in long-term
    animal studies.
    
        6. Long-Term Animal Studies. Criteria for the
    technical adequacy of animal  carcinogenicity
    studies have been published (e.g., U.S. Food and
    Drug Administration, 1982; Interagency Regulatory
    Liaison Group, 1979; National Toxicology Program,
    1984; OSTP, 1985; U.S. EPA, 1983a, 1983b, 1983c;
    Feron et al., 1980; Mantel, 1980) and should be used
    to judge the acceptability  of  individual studies.
    Transplacental    and    multigenerational
    carcinogenesis studies, in  addition to  more
    conventional long-term animal studies, can yield
    useful information about the carcinogenicity  of
    agents.
    
        It  is recognized that chemicals that  induce
    benign tumors frequently also induce malignant
                                                    A-4
    

    -------
     tumors, and that benign tumors often progress to
     malignant tumors  (Interdisciplinary  Panel on
     Carcinogenicity, 1984). The incidence of benign and
     malignant tumors will  be combined when
     scientifically defensible (OSTP, 1985; Principle 8).
     For example, the Agency will, in general, consider
     the combination of benign and malignant tumors to
     be scientifically defensible unless the benign tumors
     are not considered to have the potential to progress
     to  the associated  malignancies of the same
     histogenic origin. If an increased incidence of benign
     tumors is observed in  the  absence  of malignant
     tumors,  in most cases the evidence will be
     considered as limited evidence of carcinogenicity.
    
        The  weight of  evidence that  an agent is
     potentially carcinogenic for  humans increases (1)
     with the increase in  number of tissue sites affected
     by  the agent; (2) with the increase in number of
     animal species, strains, sexes, and number of
     experiments and  doses showing a  carcinogenic
     response; (3) with the occurrence of clear-cut dose-
     response relationships as well as a  high level of
     statistical significance of  the  increased tumor
     incidence in treated compared to control groups; (4)
     when there is a dose-related shortening of the time-
     to-tumor occurrence or time to death with  tumor;
     and (5) when there is a dose-related increase in the
     proportion of tumors  that are malignant.
    
        Long-term animal studies at  or  near the
     maximum tolerated  dose level (MTD) are used to
     ensure an adequate power for the detection of
     carcinogenic
                      [51 PR 33995]
                                   activity  (NTP,
     1984;'IARC, 1982). Negative long-term animal
     studies at exposure levels above the MTD may not be
     acceptable if animal survival is so impaired that the
     sensitivity  of the study is  significantly reduced
     below that of a conventional chronic animal study at
     the MTD. The OSTP (1985; Principle 4) has stated
     that.
     The carcinogenic effects of agents may be influenced by non-
     physiological responses (such as extensive organ damage, radical
     disruption of hormonal  function, saturation of metabolic
     pathways, formation of stones in the urinary tract, saturation of
     ON A repair with a functional loss of the system) induced in the
     model systems. Testing regimes inducing these responses should
     be evaluated for their relevance to the human response to an
     agent and  evidence from such a study, whether  positive or
     negative, must be carefully reviewed.
    
     Positive studies at levels above the MTD should be
     carefully reviewed to ensure that the responses are
     not due to factors which do not operate at exposure
     levels below the MTD. Evidence indicating that high
     exposures alter tumor responses by  indirect
     mechanisms that may be unrelated to effects at'
    lower  exposures  should be dealt with  on an
    individual basis. As noted  by the OSTP (1985),
    "Normal  metabolic activation of carcinogens  may
    possibly also be altered  and  carcinogenic potential
    reduced as a consequence [of high-dose testingJ."
       Carcinogenic responses under conditions of the
    experiment should be reviewed carefully as they
    relate to the relevance of the evidence to human
    carcinogenic risks (e.g., the occurrence of bladder
    tumors in the presence of bladder stones  and
    implantation  site sarcomas).  Interpretation of
    animal studies is aided by the review of target organ
    toxicity and other effects (e.g., changes in the
    immune and endocrine systems) that may be noted
    in prechronic or other lexicological studies. Time
    and dose-related changes in  the  incidence of
    preneoplastic lesions  may also be  helpful in
    interpreting animal studies.
    
       Agents that are positive in long-term  animal
    experiments and also show evidence of promoting or
    cocarcinogenic activity in specialized tests should be
    considered as complete carcinogens unless there is
    evidence to the contrary because it is, at present,
    difficult to determine whether  an agent is only a
    promoting or  cocarcinogenic agent. Agents that
    show positive results in special tests for initiation,
    promotion, or cocarcinogenicity and no indication of
    tumor response in well-conducted and well-designed
    long-term animal studies should be dealt with on an
    individual basis.
    
       To evaluate carcinogenicity,  the primary
    comparison is  tumor response in dosed animals as
    compared  with that in contemporary matched
    control animals. Historical control data are often
    valuable, however, and could be used along with
    concurrent control data  in the evaluation of
    carcinogenic responses (Haseman et al., 1984). For
    the evaluation of rare tumors,  even small tumor
    responses may be significant compared to historical
    data. The review of tumor data at sites with high
    spontaneous background  requires  special
    consideration (OSTP,  1985;  Principle 9).  For
    instance, a response that is significant with respect
    to the experimental control group may become
    questionable if the historical control data indicate
    that the  experimental control group had an
    unusually low background incidence (NTP, 1984).
    
       For a number of reasons, there  are widely
    diverging scientific views (OSTP, 1985; Ward et al.,
    1979a, b; Tomatis, 1977;  Nutrition Foundation,
    1983) about the validity of mouse liver tumors as an
    indication of potential carcinogenicity in humans
    when such tumors occur  in  strains  with high
    spontaneous background incidence and when they
    constitute the only tumor response to an agent.
    These Guidelines take the position that when  the
    only tumor response is in the mouse liver and when
    other conditions for a classification of "sufficient"
    evidence in animal studies are  met (e.g., replicate
    studies, malignancy, see section IV), the data should
    be considered as "sufficient"  evidence of
    carcinogenicity.  It is understood  that this
    classification could be changed on a case-by-case
    basis to "limited," if warranted, when factors such as
    the following, are observed: an increased incidence
                                                  A-5
    

    -------
    of tumors only in the highest dose group and/or only
    at the end of the study; no substantial dose-related
    increase in  the proportion  of  tumors that are
    malignant; the occurrence  of  tumors that are
    predominantly benign; no dose-related shortening of
    the time to the appearance of tumors; negative or
    inconclusive results from a spectrum of short-term
    tests for mutagenic activity; the occurrence of excess
    tumors only in a single sex.
    
        Data from all long-term animal studies are to be
    considered in the evaluation of carcinogenicity. A
    positive   carcinogenic  response  in  one
    species/strain/sex  is not  generally negated by
    negative results in other  species/strain/sex.
    Replicate negative studies that are essentially
    identical in all other respects to a positive study may
    indicate that the positive results are spurious.
    
        Evidence for carcinogenic action should be based
    on the observation of statistically significant tumor
    responses in specific organs or tissues, Appropriate
    statistical analysis should be performed on data
    from long-term studies to  help determine whether
    the effects are treatment-related or possibly due to
    chance.  These should at least include a statistical
    test for  trend, including appropriate correction for
    differences in survival. The weight to be given to the
    level of statistical significance (the p-value) and to
    other available pieces of information is a matter of
    overall  scientific judgment.  A  statistically
    significant excess of tumors of all  types in the
    aggregate, in the absence of a  statistically
    significant increase of any individual tumor  type,
    should  be regarded as  minimal  evidence of
    carcinogenic action unless there are persuasive
    reasons to the contrary.
    
        7. Human Studies.  Epidemiologic studies
    provide  unique information about the response of
    humans who have been exposed  to suspect
    carcinogens. Descriptive epidemiologic studies are
    useful in generating hypotheses and providing
    supporting data, but can rarely be used to  make a
    causal inference. Analytical epidemiologic studies of
    the case-control or cohort variety, on the other hand,
    are especially useful in assessing risks to  exposed
    humans.
    
        Criteria  for the adequacy  of epidemiologic
    studies are well  recognized. They include factors
    such as the proper selection and characterization of
    exposed and control groups,  the  adequacy of
    duration and quality of follow-up, the  proper
    identification and characterization of confounding
    factors and bias, the appropriate consideration of
    latency effects, the valid ascertainment of the causes
    of morbidity  and death, and  the ability to detect
    specific effects.  Where  it can be calculated, the
    statistical power to detect an appropriate outcome
    should be included in the assessment.
    
        The strength of the epidemiologic evidence for
    carcinogenicity depends, among other things, on the
    type of analysis  and on the magnitude and
    specificity of the response. The weight of evidence
    increases  rapidly with the number of adequate
    studies that show comparable results on populations
    exposed  to the same agent under different
    conditions.
    
       It should be recognized that epidemiologic
    studies are inherently capable of detecting oi.ly
    comparatively large increases in the relative risk of
                    [51 PR 33996]
                                   cancer. Negative
    results from such studies cannot prove the absence
    of carcinogenic action; however, negative results
    from a well-designed  and well-conducted
    epidemiologic study  that contains usable exposure
    data can serve to define upper limits of risk; these
    are useful if animal evidence indicates that the
    agent is potentially carcinogenic in humans.
    
    C. Weight of Evidence
    
       Evidence of possible carcinogenicity in humans
    comes primarily from two sources: long-term animal
    tests and epidemiologic investigations. Results from
    these studies are supplemented with available
    information from short-term tests, pharmacokinetic
    studies, comparative metabolism studies, structure-
    activity relationships, and other relevant toxicologic
    studies. The question of how likely an agent is to be
    a human carcinogen should be answered in the
    framework of a weight-of-evidence judgment.
    Judgments about the weight  of evidence involve
    considerations of the quality and adequacy of the
    data and the kinds  and consistency of responses
    induced by a suspect carcinogen.  There are three
    major steps to characterizing the weight of evidence
    for carcinogenicity in humans: (1) characterization
    of the evidence from human studies and from animal
    studies individually, (2) combination of the
    characterizations of these two types of data into an
    indication of the overall weight of evidence for
    human carcinogenicity, and (3) evaluation of all
    supporting information to determine if the overall
    weight of evidence should be modified.
    
        EPA has developed a system for stratifying the
    weight of  evidence  (see section  IV).  This
    classification is not meant to be applied rigidly or
    mechanically.  At various points in the above
    discussion, EPA has emphasized the need for an
    overall, balanced judgment of the  totality of the
    available  evidence. Particularly for well-studied
    substances, the scientific data base will have  a
    complexity that cannot be captured  by  any
    classification scheme.  Therefore, the hazard
    identification section should  include  a narrative
    summary  of the strengths and weaknesses  of the
    evidence as well as its categorization  in the EPA
    scheme.
    
        The EPA classification system is, in general, an
    adaptation of the International Agency for Research
    on Cancer (IARC, 1982) approach for classifying the
                                                   A-6
    

    -------
     weight of evidence for human data and animal data.
     The  EPA  classification  system  for  the
     characterization of the overall weight of evidence for
     carcinogenicity (animal,  human,  and  other
     supportive data) includes: Group A - Carcinogenic
     to Humans; Group B — Probably Carcinogenic to
     Humans; Group C  -  Possibly Carcinogenic to
     Humans; Group D — Not Classifiable as to Human
     Carcinogenicity; and Group E - Evidence of Non-
     Carcinogenicity for Humans.
    
        The  following  modifications of the  IARC
     approach have been made for classifying human and
     animal studies.
        For human studies:
        (1) The observation of a statistically significant
     association between an agent and life-threatening
     benign tumors in  humans is  included  in  the
     evaluation of risks to humans.
        (2) A "no data available" classification is added.
        (3) A  "no evidence of  carcinogenicity"
     classification is added.  This classificaton indicates
     that no association was found between exposure and
     increased risk  of cancer in  well-conducted, well-
     designed, independent analytical epidemiologic
     studies.
        For animal studies:
        (1) An increased incidence  of combined benign
     and malignant tumors will be considered to provide
     sufficient evidence of carcinogenicity if the other
     criteria defining the "sufficient" classification of
     evidence  are met (e.g.,  replicate  studies,
     malignancy; see section IV). Benign and malignant
     tumors  will be combined  when scientifically
     defensible.
        (2) An increased incidence of benign tumors
     alone generally constitutes "limited" evidence of
     carcinogenicity.
        (3) An increased incidence of neoplasms that
     occur with high spontaneous background incidence
     (e.g., mouse liver tumors and rat pituitary tumors in
     certain strains) generally constitutes "sufficient"
     evidence of carcinogenicity, but may be changed to
     "limited" when warranted  by the  specific
     information available on the agent.
        (4) A "no data available" classification has been
     added.
        (5)  A  "no evidence of  carcinogenicity"
     classification  is also  added. This operational
     classification would include substances for  which
     there is no increased incidence of neoplasms in at
     least two well-designed and well-conducted animal
     studies of adequate power and  dose in different
     species.
    
     D. Guidance for Dose-Response Assessment
    
        The qualitative evidence for careinogenesis
     should be discussed for purposes of guiding the dose-
     response assessment. The guidance should be given
     in terms of the appropriateness and limitations of
     specific  studies as well as pharmacokinetic
    considerations that should be factored into the dose-
    response assessment. The appropriate method of
    extrapolation should be factored in when the
    experimental  route of exposure differs from that
    occurring in humans.
    
       Agents that are judged to be in the EPA weight-
    of-evidence stratification Groups A and B would be
    regarded  as  suitable  for quantitative risk
    assessments. Agents that are judged to be in Group
    C will generally be regarded as suitable for
    quantitative risk assessment, but judgments in this
    regard may be made on a case-by-case basis. Agents
    that are judged to be in Groups D and  E would not
    have quantitative risk assessments.
    
    E. Summary and Conclusion
    
       The summary should present all of the key
    findings in all of the sections of the qualitative
    assessment and  the  interpretive rationale that
    forms the basis for the conclusion. Assumptions,
    uncertainties in the evidence, and other factors that
    may affect the relevance of the evidence to humans
    should be discussed. The conclusion should present
    both  the  weight-of-evidence  ranking  and a
    description that brings out the more subtle aspects of
    the evidence that  may not be evident from the
    ranking alone.
    
    HI.  Dote-Retponte Assessment,  Exposure
    Attettment, and Ritk Characterization
    
       After  data concerning  the carcinogenic
    properties of a substance  have been collected,
    evaluated, and categorized, it is frequently desirable
    to estimate the likely range of excess cancer risk
    associated  with given levels and conditions of
    human exposure. The first step of the analysis
    needed to make such estimations is the development
    of the likely relationship between dose and response
    (cancer incidence) in the region of human exposure.
    This information on dose-response relationships is
    coupled with information on  the nature and
    magnitude of human exposure to yield an estimate
    of human risk. The risk-characterization step also
    includes an interpretation of these estimates in light
    of the biological, statistical,  and exposure
    assumptions  and uncertainties that  have arisen
    throughout the process of assessing risk.
    
       The elements of dose-response assessment are
    described in  section  III.A. Guidance on human
    exposure assessment is provided in another EPA
                     [51 FR 339971
                                   document (U.S.
    EPA, 1986); however,  section  III.B. of these
    Guidelines includes a brief description of the specific
    type of exposure information that is useful for
    carcinogen risk assessment Finally, in section III.C.
    on risk characterization, there is a description of the
    manner in which risk  estimates should be presented
    so as to be most informative.
    
       It should be emphasized  that calculation of
    quantitative  estimates  of cancer risk does not
                                                  A-7
    

    -------
    require that an agent be carcinogenic in humans.
    The likelihood that an agent is a human carcinogen
    is a function of the weight of evidence, as this has
    been described in the hazard identification section of
    these Guidelines. It  is'nevertheless important to
    present quantitative estimates, appropriately
    qualified and interpreted, in  those circumstances in
    which there is a reasonable possibility,  based on
    human and animal data, that  the  agent is
    carcinogenic in humans.
    
        It should be emphasized in every quantitative
    risk estimation that the results are uncertain.
    Uncertainties  due  to   experimental  and
    epidemiologic variability as  well as uncertainty in
    the exposure assessment can be important. There
    are major uncertainties  in extrapolating both from
    animals to humans  and from high to low doses.
    There are important species differences in uptake,
    metabolism, and organ distribution of carcinogens,
    as well as species  and strain differences in target-
    site susceptibility.  Human populations are variable
    with  respect to genetic constitution, diet,
    occupational  and home environment, activity
    patterns, and other cultural factors. Risk estimates
    should be presented  together with the associated
    hazard assessment (section III.C.3.) to ensure that
    there is an appreciation of the weight of evidence for
    carcinogenicity that underlies the quantitative risk
    estimates.
    
    A. Dose-Response Assessment
    
        1. Selection of Data. As indicated in section II.O.,
    guidance needs to be given by the individuals doing
    the qualitative  assessment  (toxicologists,
    pathologists, pharmacologists, etc.) to those doing
    the quantitative assessment as to the appropriate
    data to be  used in the dose-response assessment.
    This is determined by the quality of the data, its
    relevance to human  modes of exposure,  and other
    technical details.
    
        If available, estimates based on adequate human
    epidemiologic data are preferred over estimates
    based on animal data. If adequate exposure data
    exist in a well-designed and well-conducted negative
    epidemiologic study, it may be possible to obtain an
    upper-bound estimate  of risk from that study.
    Animal-based estimates, if available, also should be
    presented.
    
        In the absence of appropriate human studies,
    data from a species that responds most like humans
    should be used, if information to this effect exists.
    Where, for a  given  agent, several studies are
    available,  which  may  involve different animal
    species, strains, and sexes at several doses and by
    different routes of exposure,  the following approach
    to selecting the data sets is used: (1) The tumor
    incidence data are  separated according to organ site
    and tumor type. (2) All biologically and statistically
    acceptable data sets are presented. (3) The range of
    the risk estimates is presented with due regard to
    biological relevance (particularly in  the  case of
    animal studies) and appropriateness of route of
    exposure. (4) Because it is possible that human
    sensitivity  is  as high as the most sensitive
    responding  animal  species, in the  absence of
    evidence to the contrary, the biologically acceptable
    data set from long-term animal studies showing the
    greatest sensitivity should generally be given the
    greatest emphasis,  again  with due regard to
    biological and statistical considerations.
    
       When the exposure route in the species from
    which the dose-response information is obtained
    differs from  the route occurring in environmental
    exposures, the considerations used in  making the
    route-to-route  extrapolation must be carefully
    described. All assumptions should be presented
    along with a discussion of the uncertainties in the
    extrapolation. Whatever procedure is adopted in a
    given case, it must be consistent with the  existing
    metabolic and  pharmacokinetic  information on the
    chemical (e.g., absorption efficiency via the gut and
    lung,  target  organ doses, and changes in placental
    transport throughout gestation  for transplacental
    carcinogens).
    
       Where two or more significantly elevated tumor
    sites  or  types are observed in the  same study,
    extrapolations may be conducted on selected sites or
    types. These selections will be made on biological
    grounds. To  obtain a total  estimate of carcinogenic
    risk, animals with one or more tumor sites or types
    showing significantly elevated tumor incidence
    should be pooled and used for extrapolation. The
    pooled estimates will generally be used in preference
    to risk estimates based on single sites or types.
    Quantitative risk extrapolations will generally not
    be done on the basis of totals that include tumor sites
    without statistically significant elevations.
    
       Benign tumors should generally be combined
    with malignant tumors for  risk estimates unless the
    benign tumors are  not considered to have the
    potential to progress to the associated malignancies
    of the same histogenic origin. The contribution of
    the benign tumors, however, to the total risk should
    be indicated.
    
       2. Choice of Mathematical Extrapolation Moael.
    Since risks at low exposure  levels cannot be
    measured directly either by animal experiments or
    by epidemiologic studies, a number of mathematical
    models have been developed to extrapolate from
    high to low dose. Different extrapolation models,
    however, may  fit the observed data reasonably well
    but may lead  to large differences in the projected
    risk at low doses.
    
        As was  pointed out by OSTP (1985; Principle
    26),
        No single mathematical procedure  it rvcogniaad as the most
    appropriate for tow-dose extrapolation  in csrcinogenesis. When
    relevant biological evidence on mechanism of action eziata (e.g.,
    pharmacokinetics, target organ doae), the model* or  procedures
                                                    A-8
    

    -------
    employed should be consistent with the evidence. When data and
    information are limited, however, and when much uncertainty
    existe regarding the mechanism of carcinogenic action, models or
    procedures which incorporate low-dose linearity are preferred
    when compatible with the limited information.
    
    At present, mechanisms of the  carcinogenesis
    process are largely unknown and data are generally
    limited. If a carcinogenic agent acts by accelerating
    the  same carcinogenic process that leads to the
    background occurrence of cancer, the added effect of
    the  carcinogen at low  doses  is  expected  to  be
    virtually linear (Crumpet al., 1976).
    
        The Agency will review each assessment as to
    the evidence on carcinogenesis mechanisms and
    other biological or statistical evidence that indicates
    the suitability of a particular extrapolation model.
    Goodness-of-fit to the experimental observations is
    not an  effective means of discriminating among
    models (OSTP, 1985). A rationale will be included to
    justify the use of the chosen model. In the absence of
    adequate information to the contrary, the linearized
    multistage  procedure will  be  employed. Where
    appropriate,  the results of using  various
    extrapolation models may be useful for comparison
    with the  linearized multistage procedure. When
    longitudinal data  on tumor  development are
    available, time-to-tumor models may be used.
    
        It should be emphasized that the linearized
    multistage procedure leads to •
                     [51 PR 33998]
                                   a plausible upper
    limit to the risk  that is consistent with some
    proposed mechanisms  of carcinogenesis.  Such an
    estimate, however, does not necessarily give a
    realistic prediction of the risk. The true value of the
    risk is unknown, and may be as low as zero. The
    range of risks, defined by the upper limit given by
    the chosen model and the lower limit which may be
    as low  as zero, should be explicitly stated. An
    established procedure does not yet exist for making
    "most likely" or "best" estimates of risk within the
    range of uncertainty defined by the  upper and lower
    limit estimates. If data and procedures  become
    available, the Agency will also provide "most likely"
    or "best" estimates of risk. This will be most feasible
    when human data are available and when exposures
    are in the dose range of the data.
    
          In certain cases, the  linearized multistage
    procedure cannot be used with the observed data as,
    for example, when the data are nonmonotonic or
    flatten out at high doses. In these cases, it may be
    necessary to make adjustments to achieve low-dose
    linearity.
    
          When pharmacokinetic or metabolism data
    are available, or when other substantial evidence on
    the mechanistic aspects of the  carcinogenesis
    process exists, a low-dose extrapolation model other
    than the linearized multistage procedure might be
    considered more appropriate on biological grounds.
    When a different model  is  chosen, the  risk
    assessment should clearly discuss  the nature and
    weight of evidence  that led  to the  choice.
    Considerable uncertainty will remain concerning
    response at low doses; therefore, in most cases  an
    upper-limit risk estimate  using the linearized
    multistage procedure should also be presented.
    
       3. Equivalent Exposure Units Among  Species.
    Low-dose risk estimates derived from laboratory
    animal data extrapolated to  humans are
    complicated by a variety of factors that differ among
    species and potentially affect the response  to
    carcinogens. Included among these factors are
    differences between humans and experimental test
    animals with respect to life span, body size, genetic
    variability, population homogeneity, existence of
    concurrent disease, pharmacokinetic effects such as
    metabolism and excretion  patterns, and the
    exposure regimen.
    
       The usual  approach for making interspecies
    comparisons has been  to use standardized scaling
    factors. Commonly employed standardized dosage
    scales include mg per kg body  weight per day, ppm
    in the diet or water, mg per m2 body surface area per
    day, and mg per kg body weight per lifetime. In the
    absence of comparative lexicological, physiological,
    metabolic, and pharmacokinetic data for a given
    suspect carcinogen, the Agency takes the  position
    that the extrapolation on the basis of surface area is
    considered to be appropriate because  certain
    pharmacological effects commonly scale according to
    surface area (Dedrick, 1973; Freireich et al., 1966;
    Pinkel, 1958).
    
    B. Exposure Assessment
    
       In order to obtain a quantitative estimate of the
    risk, the results of the dose-response assessment
    must be combined with an estimate of the exposures
    to which the populations of interest are likely to be
    subject. While  the  reader  is referred to  the
    Guidelines for Estimating Exposures (U.S. EPA,
    1986) for specific details, it is important to convey an
    appreciation of the impact of the strengths and
    weaknesses of exposure assessment on the overall
    cancer risk assessment process.
    
       At present there is no single approach to
    exposure assessment  that  is appropriate for  all
    cases. On a case-by-case basis, appropriate methods
    are selected to match the date on hand and the level
    of sophistication required.  The assumptions,
    approximations, and uncertainties need to be clearly
    stated because, in some instances, these will  have a
    major effect on the risk assessment
    
       In  general,  the  magnitude, duration, and
    frequency of exposure provide fundamental
    information for estimating the concentration of the
    carcinogen to which the organism is exposed. These
    date are generated from monitoring information,
    modeling results, and/or reasoned estimates.  An
    appropriate treatment of exposure should consider
                                                  A-9
    

    -------
    the potential for exposure via ingestion, inhalation,
    and dermal penetration from relevant sources of
    exposures including multiple avenues of intake from
    the same source.
    
        Special problems arise when  the human
    exposure  situation of concern suggests  exposure
    regimens, e.g.,  route and dosing schedule that are
    substantially  different from those  used in the
    relevant animal studies. Unless there is evidence to
    the contrary in a particular case, the cumulative
    dose received over a lifetime, expressed as average
    daily exposure  prorated over  a lifetime, is
    recommended as an appropriate  measure of
    exposure to a carcinogen. That is, the assumption is
    made that a high dose of a carcinogen received over a
    short period of time is equivalent to a corresponding
    low dose  spread  over  a lifetime. This approach
    becomes more problematical as the exposures in
    question become  more intense but less  frequent,
    especially when there is evidence that the agent has
    shown dose-rate effects.
    
        An attempt should be made to assess the level of
    uncertainty  associated  with  the exposure
    assessment which is to be  used in a cancer risk
    assessment This  measure of uncertainty should be
    included in the risk characterization (section III.C.)
    in order to provide the decision-maker with a clear
    understanding of  the impact of this uncertainty on
    any final quantitative risk estimate. Subpopulations
    with heightened susceptibility (either because of
    exposure or predisposition) should, when possible, be
    identified.
    
    C. Risk Characterization
    
        Risk characterization is composed of two parts.
    One is a presentation of the numerical estimates of
    risk; the other  is  a framework  to help judge the
    significance of the  risk. Risk characterization
    includes the exposure assessment and dose-response
    assessment; these are used in  the estimation of
    carcinogenic risk.  It may also consist of a unit-risk
    estimate which can be combined elsewhere with the
    exposure assessment for the purposes of estimating
    cancer risk.
    
        Hazard identification and  dose-response
    assessment are covered in sections II. and III.A., and
    a detailed discussion of exposure assessment is
    contained  in EPA's Guidelines  for  Estimating
    Exposures (U.S. EPA, 1986). This section deals with
    the numerical  risk estimates and  the  approach to
    summarizing risk  characterization.
    
        1. Options for Numerical Risk Estimates.
    Depending on the needs of the individual program
    offices, numerical  estimates can be presented in one
    or more of the following three ways.
        a. Unit Risk - Under an assumption of low-dose
    linearity, the unit cancer risk is the excess lifetime
    risk due to a continuous constant lifetime exposure
    of one  unit of carcinogen concentration. Typical
    exposure units include ppm or ppb in food or water,
    mg/kg/day by ingestion, or ppm or ug/m3 in air.
       b. Dose Corresponding to a Given Level of Risk -
    This approach can be useful, particularly  when
    using nonlinear extrapolation  models where  the
    unit risk would differ at different dose levels.
       c. Individual and Population Risks - Risks may
    be characterized either in terms of  the excess
    individual lifetime risks,  the excess  number of
    cancers
                    [51 PR 33999]
                                   produced  per
    year in the exposed population, or both.
          Irrespective of the options chosen, the degree
    of precision  and accuracy in the numerical risk
    estimates currently do not permit more than one
    significant figure to be presented.
    
       2. Concurrent Exposure. In characterizing  the
    risk due to  concurrent  exposure  to several
    carcinogens, the risks are combined on the basis of
    additivity unless there is specific information to the
    contrary. Interactions of cocarcinogens, promoters,
    and  inititators with known carcinogens should be
    considered on a case-by-case basis.
    
       3. Summary of Risk  Characterization.
    Whichever method of presentation is chosen, it is
    critical that the numerical estimates not be allowed
    to stand alone,  separated fcom the various
    assumptions and uncertainties upon which they are
    based. The risk characterization should contain a
    discussion and interpretation of the numerical
    estimates that affords the  risk manager some
    insight into the degree to  which  the quantitative
    estimates are likely to reflect the true magnitude of
    human risk, which generally cannot be known with
    the degree of quantitative accuracy reflected in the
    numerical estimates. The final risk estimate will be
    generally rounded to one significant figure and will
    be coupled with  the EPA classification of  the
    qualitative weight of evidence.  For example, a
    lifetime individual risk of 2X10-* resulting from
    exposure to a "probable human carcinogen" (Group
    B2)  should be designated as 2Xl(M  [B2]  . This
    bracketed designation of the qualitative weight of
    evidence should be included with all numerical risk
    estimates (i.e., unit  risks, which are risks at a
    specified concentration or  concentrations
    corresponding to a given risk). Agency statements,
    such as FEDERAL REGISTER notices, briefings,
    and  action  memoranda, frequently include
    numerical estimates of carcinogenic risk. It  is
    recommended that whenever these numerical
    estimates are used, the  qualitative weight-of-
    evidence classification should also  be included.
    
       The section on risk characterization  should
    summarize the hazard identification, dose-response
    assessment,  exposure assessment, and the  public
    health risk estimates. Major assumptions, scientific
    judgments, and, to the extent possible,  estimates of
                                                  A-10
    

    -------
    the uncertainties embodied in the assessment are
    presented.
    IV. EPA Classification System for Categorizing
    Weight of Evidence for Careinogenieity from Human
    and Animal Studies (Adapted from I ARC)
    A.  Assessment  of Weight of Evidence for
    Careinogenieity from Studies in Humans
    
        Evidence of Careinogenieity from human studies
    comes from three main sources:
        1. Case reports of individual cancer patients who
    were exposed to the agenda).
        2. Descriptive epidemiologic studies in which the
    incidence of cancer in human populations was found
    to vary  in space  or time with  exposure to the
    agent(s).
        3.  Analytical epidemiologic (case-control and
    cohort) studies in which individual exposure  to the
    agent(s) was  found to be associated  with an
    increased risk of cancer.
    
        Three  criteria must be met before a causal
    association can be inferred between exposure and
    cancer in humans:
        1. There is no identified bias that could explain
    the association.
        2.  The possibility  of  confounding has been
    considered  and  ruled out as  explaining the
    association.
        3.  The association is  unlikely to be due  to
    chance.
    
        In general, although a single study  may be
    indicative of a cause-effect relationship, confidence
    in inferring a causal association is increased when
    several independent studies are  concordant  in
    showing the  association, when the association is
    strong, when there is a dose-response relationship,
    or when a reduction in exposure is  followed by a
    reduction in the incidence of cancer.
    
        The weight of evidence for Careinogenieity 1 from
    studies in humans is classified as:
        1.  Sufficient evidence of Careinogenieity,  which
    indicates that there is a causal relationship between
    the agent and human cancer.
        2.  Limited  evidence  of Careinogenieity, which
    indicates that a causal interpretation is credible, but
    that alternative explanations, such as chance, bias,
    or confounding, could not adequately be excluded.
         1 For purposes of public health protection, agents
     associated with life-threatening benign tumors in humans are
     included in the evaluation.
         2 An increased incidence of neoplaama that occur with high
     •pontanaoua background incidence (e.g., mouse liver tumors
     and rat pituitary tumors in certain strains) generally
     constitutes "sufficient'' evidence of Careinogenieity, but may be
     changed to "limited" when warranted by the specific
     information available on the agent.
         3 Benign and malignant tumors will be combined unless
     the benign tumors are not considered to have the potential to
     progress to the associated malignancies of the same histogenie
     origin.
       3. Inadequate evidence, which indicates that one
    of two conditions prevailed: (a)  there were few
    pertinent data, or (b) the available studies, while
    showing evidence of association, did not exclude
    chance, bias, or confounding, and therefore a causal
    interpretation is not credible.
       4. No data, which indicates that data are not
    available.
       5.  No evidence, which indicates that  no
    association was found between exposure  and an
    increased risk of cancer in well-designed and well-
    conducted independent analytical epidemiologic
    studies.
    
    B. Assessment of Weight of Evidence for
    Careinogenieity from Studies in Experimental
    Animals
       These assessments are classified  into five
    groups:
       1. Sufficient evidence2 of Careinogenieity, which
    indicates that there  is ah increased incidence  of
    malignant tumors or combined  malignant and
    benign tumors:3 (a) in multiple species or strains; or
    (b) in multiple experiments (e.g., with different
    routes of administration or using different dose
    levels); or (c) to an unusual degree in a single
    experiment with regard to high incidence, unusual
    site or type of tumor, or early age at onset
       Additional evidence may be provided by data  on
    dose-response effects, as well as information from
    short-term tests or on chemical structure.
       2. Limited evidence of Careinogenieity, which
    means that the data suggest a carcinogenic effect
    but are limited because: (a) the studies  involve a
    single species, strain, or experiment and do not meet
    criteria for sufficient evidence (see section IV. B.l.e);
    (b) the experiments  are restricted by inadequate
    dosage levels, inadequate duration of exposure to the
    agent, inadequate period of follow-up, poor survival,
    too few animals, or inadequate reporting: or (c)  an
    increase in the incidence of benign tumors only.
       3. Inadequate evidence, which indicates that
    because  of major qualitative or  quantitative
    limitations, the studies cannot be interpreted  as
    showing either the presence  or absence of a
    carcinogenic effect.
       4. No  data, which indicates that data  are not
    available.
       5. No evidence, which indicates that there is  no
    increased  incidence of neoplasms in at  least two
    well-designed
                     [51 PR 34000]
                                     and      well-
    conducted animal studies in different species.
    
          The classifications "sufficient evidence" and
    "limited evidence" refer only to the weight of the
    experimental  evidence that  these agents are
    carcinogenic and not  to  the potency of  their
    carcinogenic action.
                                                   A-ll
    

    -------
    C. Categorization of Overall Weight of Evidence for
    Human Carcinogenicity
    
        The  overall scheme for categorization of the
    weight of evidence of carcinogenicity of a chemical
    for humans uses a three-step process. (1) The weight
    of evidence in human studies or animal studies is
    summarized; (2) these  lines of information  are
    combined to yield a  tentative assignment  to  a
    category (see Table 1);  and (3) all relevant
    supportive information is evaluated  to see if the
    designation of the overall weight of evidence needs
    to be modified. Relevant factors  to be included along
    with the tumor information from human and animal
    studies  include structure-activity relationships;
    short-term test findings; results of appropriate
    physiological, biochemical,  and toxicological
    observations;  and comparative metabolism and
    pharmacokinetic studies. The nature of these
    findings may  cause  one to adjust  the  overall
    categorization of the weight of evidence.
    
        The  agents are categorized  into five groups as
    follows:
    
        Group A — Human Carcinogen
    
        This group is used only when there is sufficient
    evidence from epidemiologic studies  to support a
    causal association between exposure to the agents
    and cancer.
    
        Group B — Probable Human Carcinogen
    
        This group includes agents for which the weight
    of evidence of human carcinogenicity based on
    epidemiologic studies is "limited'* and also includes
    agents  for  .which  the  weight of evidence of
    carcinogenicity based  on  animal  studies is
    "sufficient."  The group  is  divided  into  two
    subgroups. Usually, Group Bl is reserved for agents
    for which there is limited evidence of carcinogenicity
    from epidemiologic  studies. It is reasonable, for
    practical purposes, to regard an agent for which
    there is  "sufficient"  evidence of carcinogenicity in
    animals  as if it presented a  carcinogenic risk to
    humans. Therefore,  agents for  which  there is
    "sufficient" evidence from animal studies and for
    which there is  "inadequate evidence" or "no data"
    from epidemiologic studies  would  usually  be
    categorized under Group B2.
    
        Group C — Possible Human Carcinogen
    
        This  group is used for agents with  limited
    evidence of carcinogenicity  in animals  in  the
    absence of human data. It includes a wide variety of
    evidence, e.g., (a) a malignant tumor  response in a
    single well-conducted experiment that does not meet
    conditions for sufficient evidence,  (b) tumor
    responses of marginal statistical significance in
    studies having  inadequate design or reporting, (c)
    benign but not malignant tumors with an agent
    showing no response in a variety of short-term tests
    for mutagenicity, and (d)  responses of marginal
    statistical significance in a tissue known to have a
    high or variable background rate.
    
        Group D  — Not Classifiable as to  Human
    Carcinogenicity
    
        This group is  generally used  for agents with
    inadequate human  and animal evidence of
    carcinogenicity or for which no data are available.
    
        Group E — Evidence of Non-Carcinogenicity for
    Humans
    
        This group is used for agents that  show no
    evidence for carcinogenicity in at least two adequate
    animal tests in different species or in both adequate
    epidemiologic and animal studies.
    
        The designation of an agent as being in Group E
    is based on the available evidence and should not be
    interpreted as a definitive conclusion that the agent
    will not be a carcinogen under any circumstances.
    
    V. References
    
    Albert, R.E., Train, R.E., and Anderson, E. 11977. Rationale
        developed by the Environmental Protection Agency for the
        assessmant of carcinogenic risks. J. Natl. Cancer Inst.
        58:1537-1541.
    Crump, US., Hoel, D.G., Ungley, C.H.. Peto R, 1976.
        Fundamental carcinogenic processes and their implications
        for low dose risk assessment. Cancer Res. 36:2973-2979.
    Dedrick, R-L. 1973. Animal Scale Up. J. Pnwrmacokinec
        Biopharm. 1:436-461.
    Feron, V J, Grice, H.C., Griesemer, fL, Peto R-, Agthe, C., Althoff,
        J., Arnold, D.I~, Blumenthal, H., CabraL JJLP., Delia Porta,
        G., Ito, N., Kimmerle, G., Kroes. R., Mohr, U.. Napalkov,
        NJ»., Odasbima, S., Page, NJ>., Schrmmm, T., Steinhoff, D.,
        Sugar, J.,Tomatis, U Uehleke, H., and Vouk, V. 1980. Basic
        requirements for  long-term assays for carcinogenicity. In:
        Long-term sod short-term screening assays for carcinogens:
        a critical appraisal IARC Monographs, Supplement 2. Lyon,
        Franca: International Agency for Research on Cancer, pp 21 -
        83.
    Freireich. E J., Gehan, E.A., Rail, D.P., Schmidt, L.H., and
        Skipper, H.E. 1966.  Quantitative comparison of toxicity of
        anticancer agent* in mouse, rat, hamster, dog, monkey and
        man. Cancer Chemother. Rep. 5O-.219-244.
    Haseman, U.K. 1984. Statistical issues in the design, analysis and
        interpretation of animal carcinogenicity studies. Environ.
        Health PerapecL 58:385-392.
    Haseman, J.K., Huff. J., and Boonnan.G-A. 1984. Use of
        historical control data in carcinogenicity studies in rodents.
        Toncol. Pathol. 12:126-135.
    Interagency Regulatory Liaison Group (IRLG). 1979. Scientific
        basis for identification of potential carcinogens and
        estimation of risks. J. Natl. Cancer Inst. 63:245-267.
    Interdisciplinary Panel on Carcinogenicity. 1984. Criteria for
        evidence of chemical carcinogenicity. Science 225:682-687.
    International Agency for Research on Cancer (I ARC). 1982. IARC
        Monographs on the
                        [51 FR 340011
                                      Evaluation of the
    Carcinogenic Risk of Chemicals to Humans, Supplement 4. Lyon,
    France: International Agency for Research on Cancer.
    Mantel, N. 1980. Assessing laboratory evidence for neoplastic
        activity. Biometrics 36 381-399.
    Mantel, N., and Haenszel, W. 1959. Statistical aspects of the
        snalysis of data from retrospective studies of disease. J. Natl.
        Cancer Inst 22:719-748.
    National Center for Tosicological Research (NCTR). 1981.
        Guideline* for statistical tests for carcinogenicity in chronic
        bioassays. NCTR Biometry Technical Report 81-001.
        Available {ram: National Center for Toxicologies! Research.
                                                     A-12
    

    -------
     TABLE 1 .-ILLUSTRATIVE CATEGORIZATION OF EVIDENCE BASED ON ANIMAL AND HUMAN DATA'
    
    
    Sufficient
    Limited
    Inadequate
    No data
    No evidence
    Animal evidence
    Sufficient
    A
    B1
    82
    82
    B2
    •
    Limited
    A
    81
    C
    C
    C
    Inadequate
    A
    81
    0
    0
    0
    No data
    A
    81
    0
    0
    0
    No evidence
    A
    81
    0
    E
    E
        1 The above assignments are presented for illustrative purposes.  There may be nuances in the classification of both
    animal and human data indicating that different categorizations than those given in the table should be assigned.
    Furthermore, these assignments are tentative and may be modified  by ancillary evidence. In this regard all relevant
    information should be evaluated to determine if the designation of the overall weight of evidence needs to be modified.
    Relevant factors to be included along with the tumor data from  human and animal studies include structure-activity
    relationships, short-term test findings, results of appropriate physiological, biochemical, and lexicological observations, and
    comparative metabolism and pharmacokinetic studies. The nature of these findings may cause an adjustment of the overall
    categorization of the weight of evidence.
     National Research Council (NRC). 1983. Risk assessment in the
        Federal government: managing the process. Washington,
        D.C J National Academy Press.
     National Toxicology Program. 1984. Report of the Ad Hoc Panel
        on Chemical Carcinogeneais Testing and Evaluation of the
        National Toxicology Program, Board of Scientific
        Counselors.  Available from: US. Government Printing
        Office, Washington, D.C. 1984-421-132:4726.
     Nutrition Foundation. 1983. The relevance of mouse liver
        bepatoma to human carcinogenic risk: a report of the
        International Expert Advisory Committee to the Nutrition
        Foundation. Available from: Nutrition Foundation. ISBN 0-
        935368-37-x.
     Office of Science and Technology Policy (OSTP). 1985. Chemical
        carcinogens: review of the science and ita associated
        principles. Federal Register 50:10372-10442.
     Peto, R., Pike, M., Day. N., Gray, R., Lee. P., Pariah. S., Peto, J.,
        Richard, S., and Wahrendorf, J. 1980. Guideline* for simple.
        sensitive, significant tests for carcinogenic effecta in long-
        term animal experiments. In: Monographs on the long-term
        and short-term screening assays for carcinogens: a critical
        appraisal. I ARC Monographs. Supplement 2. Lyon, France:
        International Agency for Research on Cancer, pp. 311 -426.
     Pinkel, D. 1958. The use of body surface area as s criterion of drug
        doaage in cancer chemotherapy. Cancer Res. 18:853-866.
    Tomatis, L. 1977. The value of long-term testing for the
        implementation of primary prevention. In: Origins of human
        cancer. Hiatt, H.H.,  Wataon, JJO.. and Winstein, J_A., eds.
        Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, pp. 1339-1357.
    US. Environmental Protection Agency (US. EPA). 1976. Interim
        procedures and guidelines for health riak and economic
        impact assessments of suspected carcinogens. Federal
        Register41:21402-21405.
    US. Environmental Protection Agency (US. EPA). 1980. Water*
        quality criteria document*; availability.  Federal Register
        45:79318-79379.
    US. Environmental Protection Agency (US. EPA). 1983a. Good
        laboratory practices standards - toxicology testing. Federal
        Register 48:53922.
    US. Environmental Protection Agency (US. EPA). 1983b.
        Hazard evaluations:  humans and domestic animals.
        Subdivision F. Available from: NTIS, Springfield,  VA. PB 83-
        153916.
    US. Environmental Protection Agency (US. EPA). 1983c. Health
        effecta test guidelines.  Available from: NTIS, Springfield,
        VA. PB 83-232984.
    US. Environmental Protection Agency (US. EPA). 1986, Sept.
                                                               24.GuideliiMM for estimating exposures. Federal Register 51
                                                               (185): 34042-34054
                                                           VS. Food and Drug Administration (US. FDA). 1982.
                                                               Toxicological principles for the safety assessment of direct
                                                               food additives and color additives used in food. Available
                                                               from: Bureau of Foods, US. Food and Drug Administration.
                                                           Ward, J.M., Griaaemer, RjC, and Weisburger. E.K. 1979a. The
                                                               mouse liver tumor aa an endpoint in carcinogeneaia teats.
                                                               ToxicoL AppL PharmacoL 51:388-397.
                                                           Ward, J.M., Goodman, D.G., Squire, R-A. Chu, K.C., and Linhart,
                                                               MS. 1979b. Neoplastic and oooneoplastic lesions in aging
                                                               (CsTBL/eNxCaH/HeN)?! (BedF^ mice. J. Natl. Cancer
                                                               lost. 63:849-854.
    
                                                           Part  B:  Response  to Public  and  Science
                                                           Advisory Board Comments
    
                                                           I. Introduction
    
                                                               This section summarizes the major issues raised
                                                           during both  the public comment period on  the
                                                           Proposed  Guidelines for Carcinogen  Risk
                                                           Assessment published on November 23, 1984 (49 FR
                                                           46294),  and  also during the  April 22-23, 1985,
                                                           meeting of the  Carcinogen  Risk Assessment
                                                           Guidelines Panel of the  Science  Advisory Board
                                                           (SAB).
    
                                                               In order to respond to these issues the Agency
                                                           modified the  proposed guidelines in  two stages.
                                                           First, changes resulting from consideration of the
                                                           public comments were  made in a draft sent to the
                                                           SAB review  panel  prior to  their April meeting.
                                                           Secondly, the guidelines were further modified in
                                                           response to the panel's recommendations.
    
                                                               The Agency received 62 sets of comments during
                                                           the  public comment period, including  28 from
                                                           corporations, 9  from professional or trade
                                                           associations,  and 4 from academic institutions. In
                                                           general,  the  comments were favorable.  The
                                                           commentors welcomed the update of the 1976
                                                           guidelines and felt that the  proposed guidelines of
                                                      A-13
    

    -------
     1985 reflected some of the progress that has occurred
     in understanding the mechanisms of carcinogenesis.
     Many commentors, however, felt  that additional
     changes were warranted.
    
        The SAB concluded that the  guidelines are
     "reasonably complete in their conceptual framework
     and are sound in their overall interpretation of the
     scientific  issues"  (Report  by   the  SAB
     Carcinogenicity Guidelines Review Group, June 19,
     1985). The SAB suggested various editorial changes
     and raised some issues  regarding the content of the
     proposed  guidelines, which are discussed below.
     Based on  these recommendations, the Agency has
     modified the draft guidelines.
    
     //. Office of Science and Technology Policy Report on
     Chemical Carcinogens
    
        Many commentors requested  that the  final
     guidelines not be issued until after publication of the
     report of the Office of Technology and Science Policy
     (OSTP) on chemical carcinogens. They further
     requested that this report  be incorporated into the
     final Guidelines for Carcinogen Risk Assessment.
    
        The final OSTP report was published in 1985 (50
     PR 10372). In its deliberations, the Agency reviewed
     the final OSTP report and feels that the Agency's
     guidelines are  consistent with the  principles
     established by the OSTP.  In its review, the SAB
     agreed that the  Agency guidelines are generally
     consistent with the OSTP report. To emphasize this
     consistency, the  OSTP  principles have  been
     incorporated into the guidelines when controversial
     issues are discussed.
    
     ///. Inference Guidelines
    
        Many commentors felt that the proposed
     guidelines did not  provide a sufficient distinction
     between scientific fact and policy decisions. Others
     felt that EPA should not attempt to  propose firm
     guidelines in the absence of scientific consensus. The
     SAB report also indicated  the need to "distinguish
     recommendations based on scientific evidence from
     those based on science policy decisions."
    
        The Agency  agrees with the recommendation
     that policy, judgmental, or inferential decisions
     should  be  clearly identified. In  its  revision of the
    proposed  guidelines,  the Agency has included
     phrases (e.g., "the Agency  takes the position that")
     to more clearly distinguish policy decisions.
    
        The Agency also recognizes the need to establish
     procedures for action on important issues in the
    absence of complete  scientific  knowledge or
    consensus. This need was acknowledged in both the
     National Academy of Sciences book entitled Risk
    Management in the Federal Government: Managing
     the Process and the OSTP  report  on chemical
    carcinogens. As the NAS report states, "Risk
    assessment is an analytic process that is firmly
     based on  scientific considerations, but it  also
    requires judgments to be made when the available
    information is  incomplete.  These judgments
    inevitably draw on both scientific and policy
    considerations."
                     [51 PR 34002]
       The judgments of the Agency have been based on
    current available scientific information and on the
    combined experience of Agency experts. These
    judgments, and  the  resulting guidance, rely  on
    inference; however, the positions taken in these
    inference guidelines are felt to be reasonable and
    scientifically defensible. While all of the guidance is,
    to some degree, based on inference, the guidelines
    have attempted  to distinguish those issues that
    depended more on judgment. In  these  cases, the
    Agency has stated a position but has also retained
    flexibility to accommodate new  data or specific
    circumstances that demonstrate that the proposed
    position is inaccurate. The Agency recognizes that
    scientific opinion will be divided on these issues.
    
       Knowledge   about   carcinogens   and
    carcinogenesis is progressing at a rapid rate. While
    these guidelines  are considered a best effort at the
    present  time, the  Agency  has attempted  to
    incorporate flexibility into the current  guidelines
    and also recommends that the guidelines be revised
    as often as warranted by advances in the field.
    
    TV. Evaluation of Benign Tumors
    
       Several commentors discussed the appropriate
    interpretation of an increased incidence of benign
    tumors alone or with an  increased incidence of
    malignant tumors as part  of the  evaluation of the
    carcinogenicity of an agent Some comments were
    supportive of the  position in the proposed guidelines,
    i.e., under certain circumstances, the incidence of
    benign and malignant tumors would be combined,
    and an increased incidence of benign tumors alone
    would be considered an indication, albeit limited, of
    carcinogenic potential. Other commentors raised
    concerns about the criteria that would  be  used to
    decide  which tumors should be combined. Only a few
    commentors felt that benign tumors should never be
    considered in evaluating carcinogenic potential.
    
       The Agency believes that current information
    supports the use of benign tumors. The guidelines
    have been modified  to incorporate the language of
    the OSTP report,  i.e., benign  tumors will be
    combined  with   malignant  tumors  when
    scientifically defensible. This  position allows
    flexibility in evaluating the data base for each
    agent  The guidelines have also  been modified to
    indicate that, whenever  benign and  malignant
    tumors have  been  combined, and the agent is
    considered  a candidate  for  quantitative risk
    extrapolation, the contribution of benign tumors to
    the estimation of risk will be indicated.
    
    V. Transplacental and Multigenerational Animal
    Bioassays
                                                  A-14
    

    -------
        As one of its two proposals for additions to the
     guidelines, the SAB recommended a discussion  of
     transplacental and multigenerational animal
     bioassays for carcinogenicity.
    
        The Agency agrees that  such data, when
     available, can  provide  useful information  in the
     evaluation of a chemical's potential carcinogenicity
     and has stated this in the final guidelines. The
     Agency has also revised the guidelines to indicate
     that such   studies may  provide additional
     information on the metabolic and pharmacokinetic
     properties of the chemical. More guidance on the
    ' specific use of  these studies will be considered  in
     future revisions of these guidelines.
    
     VI. Maximum Tolerated Dose
    
        The proposed  guidelines discussed the
     implications of using a maximum  tolerated  dose
     (MTD)  in b\passays for carcinogenicity. Many
     commentors  requested that EPA define MTD. The
     tone of  the comments  suggested that the
     commentors were concerned about the uses and
     interpretations of high-dose testing.
    
        The Agency  recognizes that controversy
     currently surrounds these issues. The appropriate
     text from the OSTP report has been incorporated
     into the final guidelines which suggests that the
     consequences of high-dose testing be evaluated on a
     case-by-case basis.
    
     VII. Mouse Liver Tumors
    
        A large  number of commentors  expressed
     opinions about the assessment of bioassays in which
     the only  increase in tumor incidence was liver
     tumors in the mouse. Many felt that mouse liver
     tumors were afforded too much credence, especially
     given existing information that indicates that they
     might arise by a different mechanism,  e.g., tissue
     damage followed by regeneration. Others felt that
     mouse liver  tumors were but one case of a  high
     background  incidence of one particular type  of
     tumor and that all such tumors should be treated in
     the same fashion.
    
        The Agency has reviewed these  comments and
     the OSTP principle regarding this issue. The OSTP
     report does not reach conclusions as to the treatment
     of tumors with a high spontaneous background rate,
     but states, as is now included in the  text of the
     guidelines,  that these data  require special
     consideration. Although  questions have been raised
     regarding the  validity  of mouse liver tumors  in
     general, the  Agency feels that mouse liver tumors
     cannot be ignored as an indicator of carcinogenicity.
     Thus, the position in the  proposed guidelines has not
     been changed: an increased incidence of only mouse
     liver tumors will be regarded as "sufficient"
     evidence of carcinogenicity if all other criteria, e.g.,
     replication  and  malignancy, are  met with the
     understanding that this classification could  be
     changed to "limited" if warranted. The factors that
    may cause this re-evaluation are indicated in the
    guidelines.
    
    V777. Vteighi-of Evidence Catagorie*
    
       The Agency was praised by both the public and
    the SAB for incorporating a weight-of-evidence
    scheme into its evaluation of carcinogenic risk.
    Certain specific aspects of the scheme, however,
    were criticized.
    
        1. Several commentors noted that while the text
    of the proposed guidelines clearly states that EPA
    will use all available data in its categorization of the
    weight of the evidence  that a  chemical is a
    carcinogen, the classification system in  Part A,
    section IV did not indicate the manner in which EPA
    will use information other than data from  humans
    and long-term animal studies in assigning a weight-
    of-evidence classification.
       The Agency  has added a discussion to Part A,
    section IV.C. dealing with the characterization of
    overall evidence for human carcinogenicity. This
    discussion clarifies  EPA's  use of supportive
    information to adjust, as warranted, the designation
    that would have been  made solely on the  basis of
    human and long-term animal studies.
    
        2.  The Agency agrees  with the SAB and those
    commentors who felt that a simple classification of
    the weight of evidence,  e.g., a single letter or even a
    descriptive title, is  inadequate to describe fully the
    weight of evidence for each individual chemical. The
    final  guidelines  propose  that  a  paragraph
    summarizing the  data should accompany the
    numerical estimate  and weight-of-evidence
    classification whenever possible.
    
        3.  Several commentors objected  to the
    descriptive title  E (No  Evidence of Carcinogenicity
    for Humans) because they felt the title would be
    confusing to people  inexperienced  with the
    classification system.  The title for Group E, No
    Evidence of Carcinogenicity for  Humans, was
    thought by these commentors to suggest the absence
    of data. This group, however, is  intended to be
    reserved for agents for which there exists  credible
    data  demonstrating that  the agent is not
    carcinogenic.
        Based on these  comments  and further
    discussion, the Agency has changed the
                    [51 PR 34003]
                                   title of Group E
    to "Evidence of Non-Carcinogenicity for Humans."
    
        4.  Several commentors felt  that the  title for
    Group C, Possible Human Carcinogen, was  not
    sufficiently distinctive from Group B, Probable
    Human Carcinogen. Other commentors felt that
    those agents that minimally qualified for Group C
    would lack sufficient data for such a label.
        The Agency recognizes that Group C covers a
    range of chemicals and has considered whether to*
    subdivide Group C. The consensus of the Agency's
                                                  A-15
    

    -------
    Carcinogen Risk Assessment Committee, however,
    is that the current groups, which are based on the
    IARC categories, are a reasonable stratification and
    should be retained at present The structure of the
    groups will be reconsidered when the guidelines are
    reviewed in the future. The Agency also feels that
    the descriptive title  it originally selected best
    conveys the meaning of the classification within the
    context of EPA's past and current activities.
    
        5. Some commentors indicated a concern about
    the distinction between Bl and B2 on the basis of
    epidemiologic evidence only. This  issue has been
    under discussion in the Agency and may be revised
    in future versions of the guidelines.
    
        6. Comments were also  received about the
    possibility of keeping the groups for animal and
    human data separate without reaching a combined
    classification. The Agency feels that a combined
    classification  is useful;  thus, the combined
    classification was retained in the final guidelines.
    
        The SAB suggested that a table be added to Part
    A, section IV to indicate the  manner in which
    human and animal data would be  combined to
    obtain an overall weight-of-evidence category. The
    Agency realizes that a table that would present all
    permutations of potentially available data would be
    complex and possibly impossible to .construct since
    numerous combinations of ancillary data  (e.g.,
    genetic toxicity, pharmacokinetics) could be used to
    raise or lower the weight-of-evidence classification.
    Nevertheless, the Agency decided to include a table
    to illustrate the  most probable  weight-of-evidence
    classification that would be assigned on the basis of
    standard  animal and human  data without
    consideration of the ancillary data. While it is hoped
    that this table will clarify the weight-of-evidence
    classifications, it is also important to recognize that
    an agent may be assigned to a final categorization
    different from the category which would appear
    appropriate from the table and still conform to the
    guidelines.
    
    IX. Quantitative Estimates of Risk
    
       The  method  for  quantitative estimates of
    carcinogenic risk in the proposed guidelines received
    substantial comments from the public. Five issues
    were discussed by the Agency and have resulted in
    modifications of the guidelines.
    
        1. The major criticism was the perception that
    EPA would use only one  method for the
    extrapolation of carcinogenic risk  and  would,
    therefore, obtain one estimate  of risk.  Even
    commentors who concur with the procedure usually
    followed  by  EPA  felt  that some indication of the
    uncertainty of the risk estimate should be included
    with the risk estimate.
       The Agency feels that the  proposed guidelines
    were not intended to suggest that  EPA would
    perform quantitative  risk estimates  in a rote or
    mechanical fashion.  As indicated by the OSTP
    report and paraphrased in the proposed guidelines,
    no single mathematical procedure has been
    determined to be the  most appropriate method for
    risk extrapolation. The final guidelines quote rather
    than paraphrase the OSTP principle. The guidelines
    have been revised to stress the importance of
    considering all available data in the risk assessment
    and now state, The Agency will review each
    assessment as to the evidence on carcinogenic
    mechanisms and other biological or statistical
    evidence that indicates the suitability of a particular
    extrapolation model." Two issues are emphasized:
    First, the text  now  indicates the  potential for
    pharmacokinetic information to  contribute to the
    assessment of carcinogenic risk.  Second,  the final
    guidelines  state that  time-to-tumor risk
    extrapolation  models   may  be used when
    longitudinal data on  tumor development  are
    available.
    
       2. A  number of commentors  noted  that the
    proposed guidelines did  not indicate  how  the
    uncertainties of risk characterization would be
    presented. The Agency has revised the  proposed
    guidelines to indicate that  major assumptions,
    scientific judgments,  and, to the extent possible,
    estimates of the uncertainties embodied in the risk
    assessment  will be  presented  along with  the
    estimation of risk.
    
       3. The proposed  guidelines stated  that the
    appropriateness of quantifying risks for chemicals in
    Group C (Possible Human Carcinogen), specifically
    those agents that were on the boundary of Groups C
    and  D  (Not  Classifiable  as  to   Human
    Carcinogenicity), would be judged on a case-by-case
    basis. Some commentors felt that quantitative risk
    assessment should not be performed on any agent in
    Group C.
       Group C includes a wide  range of agents,
    including some for which there are positive results
    in one species in one good  bioassay. Thus, the
    Agency feels that many agents in Group C will be
    suitable for quantitative risk assessment, but that
    judgments in this regard will be made on a case-by-
    case basis.
    
       4. A few commentors felt that EPA intended to
    perform quantitative  risk estimates on aggregate
    tumor  incidence. While  EPA  will consider an
    increase in total aggregate tumors as suggestive of
    potential carcinogenicity, EPA does not  generally
    intend  to make  quantitative  estimates  of
    carcinogenic risk based on total  aggregate tumor
    incidence.
    
       5. The proposed choice of body surface area as an
    interspecies scaling factor was criticized by several
    commentors who felt that body weight was  also
    appropriate and that  both methods should be used.
    The OSTP report recognizes that both scaling factors
    are in common use. The Agency feels that the choice
    of the  body surface  area scaling factor can be
                                                   A-16
    

    -------
    justified from the data on effects of drugs in various
    species. Thus, EPA will continue to use this scaling
    factor unless data on a specific agent suggest that a
    different scaling factor is justified. The uncertainty
    engendered by choice of scaling factor will  be
    included in the summary of uncertainties associated
    with the assessment of risk mentioned in point 1,
    above.
    
        In the second of its two proposals for additions to
    the proposed guidelines, the SAB suggested that a
    sensitivity analysis be  included in EPA's
    quantitative estimate of a chemical's  carcinogenic
    potency. The Agency agrees that an analysis of the
    assumptions  and uncertainties inherent in  an
    assessment of carcinogenic risk must be accurately
    portrayed. Sections of the final guidelines that deal
    with this issue have been strengthened to reflect the
    concerns of the SAB and the Agency. In particular,
    the last paragraph of the guidelines states that
    "major assumptions, scientific judgments, and, to
    the extent possible, estimates of the uncertainties
    embodied in the assessment" should be presented in
    the summary characterizing the risk. Since the
    assumptions and uncertainties will vary for  each
    assessment,  the Agency  feels that a formal
    requirement for a particular type of sensitivity
    analysis would be less useful than  a  case-by-case
    evaluation  of the particular assumptions and
    uncertainties most significant for a particular risk
    assessment.
                                                  A-17
    

    -------
                    APPENDIX B
    
    INTERNATIONAL AGENCY FOR RESEARCH ON CANCER
     WEIGHT-OF-EVIDENCE CLASSIFICATION SCHEME
    

    -------
                                            APPENDIX  B
    
                         INTERNATIONAL AGENCY FOR  RESEARCH  ON CANCER
    
                          WEIGHT-OF-EVIDENCE  CLASSIFICATION SCHEME
    
    
          The  text for this  appendix  is taken directly from  IARC,  1984.   The term
    
    "Working  Group" refers  to  the IARC Working Group on the  Evaluation  of  the
    
    Carcinogenic  Risk of  Chemicals to Humans.
          7. GENERAL PRINCIPLES APPLIED BY THE WORKING GROUP IN EVALUATING CARCINO-
          GENIC RISK OF CHEMICALS OR COMPLEX MIXTURES
    
            The widely accepted meaning of the term 'chemical carcinogenesis', and that used in these
          monographs, is the induction by chemicals (or complex mixtures of chemicals) of neoplasms
          that are not usually observed, the earlier induction of neoplasms that are commonly observed,
          and/or the induction  of more neoplasms  than are usually found - although  fundamentally
          different mechanisms may be involved  in  these three situations.  Etymologically,  the term
          'carcinogenesis' means the induction of cancer, that is, of malignant neoplasms; however, the
          commonly accepted  meaning is  the induction of various types of  neoplasms  or of  a
          combination of malignant and benign tumours.  In the monographs, the words 'tumour' and
          'neoplasm' are used interchangeably. (In the scientific literature, the terms 'tumorigen', 'oncogen'
          and 'blastomogen' have all been used synonymously with 'carcinogen', although occasionally
          'tumorigen' has been used specifically to denote a substance that induces benign tumours.)
          («) Experimental Evidence
    
            (i) Evidence for carcinogenicity in experimental animals
    
            The Working Group considers various aspects of the experimental evidence reported in the
          literature and formulates an evaluation of that evidence.
                                                 B-l
    

    -------
                             IARC MONOGRAPHS VOLUME 34
    
    
      Qualitative aspects: Both the interpretation and evaluation of a particular study as well as
    the overall assessment of the carcinogenic activity of a chemical (or complex mixture) involve
    several  considerations  of qualitative  importance, including:  (a) the  experimental parameters
    under which the chemical was tested, including route of administration and exposure, species,
    strain, sex,  age, etc.; (b) the consistency with  which the chemical has been  shown to be
    carcinogenic, e.g.,  in how many species and at which target organ(s); (c) the spectrum of
    neoplastic response, from benign neoplasm  to multiple malignant tumours; (d) the stage of
    tumour  formation in which a chemical may be involved: some chemicals act as complete
    carcinogens and have initiating and promoting activity, while others may have promoting
    activity only; and (e) the possible role of modifying factors.
    
      There are problems not only of  differential survival but of differential toxicity, which  may
    be  manifested by  unequal  growth and  weight  gain in treated  and control animals.  These
    complexities are also considered in the interpretation of data.
    
      Many chemicals  induce both  benign and malignant tumours. Among chemicals  that have
    been studied extensively, there are few  instances in which the neoplasms induced are only
    benign.  Benign tumours may represent a stage in the evolution of  a malignant neoplasm or
    they may be 'end-points' that do not readily undergo transition to malignancy.  If a substance
    is found to  induce only benign tumours in experimental animals, it should nevertheless be
    suspected of being  a carcinogen, and it requires further investigation.
    
      Hormonal carcinogenesis: Hormonal carcmogenesis presents certain  distinctive features:
    the chemicals involved occur both endogenously and exogenously;  in many  instances, long
    exposure is  required; and tumours  occur in the target tissue in association with a stimulation
    of non-neoplastic growth, although in some cases hormones promote the proliferation  of
    tumour  cells  in a target  organ.  For  hormones that occur  in  excessive  amounts, for
    hormone-mimetic agents and for agents that cause hyperactivity or imbalance in the endocrine
    system, evaluative  methods comparable with those used to identify chemical carcinogens may
    be required;  particular emphasis must be laid on quantitative aspects and duration of exposure.
    Some chemical carcinogens have significant side effects on the endocrine system, which may
    also result  in hormonal carcinogenesis.  Synthetic hormones  and  anti-hormones  can be
    expected to possess other  pharmacological and toxicological actions in addition to those on
    the endocrine system, and in this respect  they must be treated like any other chemical with
    regard to intrinsic carcinogenic potential.
    
      Complex mixtures: There  is an  increasing amount of  data from long-term carcinogenicity
    studies on complex mixtures and on crude materials obtained by sampling in an occupational
    environment. The representativity of such samples must be considered carefully.
    
      Quantitative aspects:  Dose-response studies are important in the evaluation of carcinoge-
    nesis: the confidence with which a carcinogenic effect can be established is strengthened by
    the observation of an increasing incidence of neoplasms with increasing exposure.
    
      The assessment of carcinogenicity in  animals  is frequently  complicated  by recognized
    differences among the test animals (species, strain, sex,  age)  and route and schedule of
    administration; often, the target organs at which a cancer occurs and its histological type may
    vary  with these  parameters.  Nevertheless,  indices of carcinogenic potency  in particular
    experimental systems (for instance, the dose-rate required under continuous exposure to halve
    the probability of the animals remaining tumourless (9)) have been formulated in the hope that,
    at least among categories  of fairly similar agents, such indices may be of some predictive
    value in other species, including humans.
                                             B-2
    

    -------
                                         PREAMBLE
    
    
              I carcinogens share many common biological properties, which include metabolism
          ctive (electrophilic (10-11)) intermediates capable of interacting with DNA. However, they
     t0   differ widely in the dose required to produce a given level of tumour induction. The reason
     ma^this variation  in dose-response is  not  understood,  but  it may be due to differences in
       tabolic activation and detoxification processes, in different DNA repair capacities among
     "arious organs and species or to the operation of qualitatively distinct mechanisms.
    
      Statistical analysis of animal studies: It is possible that an  anima! may die prematurely from
     unrelated causes, so that tumours that would have arisen had the animal lived longer may not
     be  observed; this  possibility must be  allowed  for. Various  analytical techniques have  been
     developed which  use the assumption  of independence of competing risks  to allow for the
     effects of intercurrent mortality on the final numbers of tumour-bearing animals in  particular
     treatment groups.
    
      For  externally visible tumours and  for  neoplasms  that  cause death,  methods  such  as
     Kaplan-Meier (i.e.,  'life-table',  'product-limit' or  'actuarial')  estimates  (9),  with associated
     significance tests (12,13), have been recommended. For internal neoplasms that are discovered
     •incidentally'  (12)  at  autopsy  but that  did not cause  the death  of the  host,  different
     estimates (14) and significance tests (12,13) may be  necessary for the unbiased study of the
     numbers of tumour-bearing animals.
    
      The design and statistical analysis of long-term carcinogenicity experiments were reviewed
     in Supplement 2 to the Monographs series (15). That review outlined the way  in which the
     context of observation of a given tumour (fatal  or incidental) could be included in an analysis
     yielding a single combined result. This method requires information on time to death for each
     animal and is therefore comparable to only  a limited extent with analyses which include global
     proportions of tumour-bearing animals.
    
      Evaluation of carcinogenicity studies in experimental animals: The evidence of carcinogeni-
    city in experimental animals is assessed by the Working Group and judged to fall into one of
    four groups, defined as follows:
    
         (1) Sufficient evidence of carcinogenicity is provided when there is an increased incidence
            of malignant tumours: (a) in  multiple species or strains; or (b) in multiple experiments
            (preferably with different routes  of administration or using different  dose levels); or
            (c) to an  unusual degree with  regard to  incidence, site or type  of tumour, or age at
            onset. Additional evidence may be provided by data on dose-response effects.
    
         (2) Limited evidence of carcinogenicity is available when the data suggest a carcinogenic
            effect but are limited because:  (a) the  studies involve  a single species,  strain or
            experiment; or (b) the experiments  are restricted by  inadequate dosage levels,
            inadequate duration of exposure to the  agent, inadequate period of follow-up, poor
            survival, too  few animals, or  inadequate reporting; or (c) the  neoplasms  produced
            often occur spontaneously and, in the past, have been difficult to classify as malignant
            by histological criteria  alone (e.g.,  lung  adenomas and  adenocarcinomas  and liver
            tumours in certain strains of mice).
         (3) Inadequate evidence is available when,  because  of major qualitative or quantitative
            limitations, the studies  cannot be interpreted as  showing either the  presence or
            absence of a carcinogenic effect.
    
         (4) No evidence applies when several adequate studies are available which show that,
            within  the limits  of  the tests  used,  the  chemical  or complex  mixture is not
            carcinogenic.
                                               B-3
    

    -------
                             IARC MONOGRAPHS VOLUME 34
    
    
      It should be noted that the categories sufficient evidence and limited evidence refer only to
    the strength  of  the  experimental evidence that these chemicals or complex mixtures are
    carcinogenic and not to the extent of their carcinogenic activity nor to the mechanism involved.
    The classification of any chemical may change as new information becomes available.
    
      (ii) Evidence for activity in short-term fesfs1
    
      Many short-term tests  bearing on postulated mechanisms of carcinogenesis  or on the
    properties of known carcinogens have been developed in recent years. The induction of cancer
    is  thought to proceed by  a  series of  steps, some of  which  have been distinguished
    experimentally (16-20). The  first step - initiation - is thought to involve  damage to DNA,
    resulting in heritable  alterations in or rearrangements of genetic information. Most  short-term
    tests in common use today are designed to evaluate the genetic activity of a substance. Data
    from these assays  are useful for identifying potential carcinogenic hazards, in identifying active
    metabolites of known carcinogens in human or animal body fluids, and in helping to elucidate
    mechanisms  of  carcinogenesis.  Short-term tests  to  detect  agents with  tumour-promoting
    activity are, at this  time, insufficiently developed.
    
      Because of the  large number of short-term tests, it is difficult to establish rigid  criteria for
    adequacy  that would be applicable to all studies. General considerations relevant to all tests,
    however, include (a)  that the test system be valid with respect to known animal carcinogens
    and  noncarcinogens; (b) that the  experimental parameters  under which the  chemical (or
    complex mixture) is tested include a sufficiently wide dose range and duration of exposure to
    the agent  and an appropriate metabolic system; (c) that appropriate  controls be used; and (d)
    that the purity of  the compound or, in  the case of complex mixtures, that the source and
    representative of the sample being  tested be specified. Confidence  in  positive results is
    increased  if a dose-response relationship is demonstrated and if this effect has been reported
    in two or more independent studies.
    
      Most established short-term tests employ  as end-points  well-defined genetic  markers in
    prokaryotes and lower eukaryotes and  in mammalian cell  lines. The tests can be grouped
    according  to the  end-point detected:
    
         Tests of DNA damage. These  include tests for covalent binding  to  DNA, induction of
            DNA breakage or repair, induction of prophage in bacteria and  differential  survival of
            DNA repair-proficient/-deficient strains of bacteria.
    
         Tests of mutation (measurement of heritable alterations in phenotype and/or  genotype).
            These include tests  for detection of the loss or alteration of  a gene product, and
            change  of function  through forward  or reverse  mutation,  recombination  and gene
            conversion;  they may  involve the nuclear genome,  the mitochondria!  genome and
            resident viral or plasmid genomes.
    
         Tests of  chromosomal effects. These include tests for detection  of changes  in
            chromosome number (aneuploidy), structural chromosomal aberrations, sister chroma-
            tid exchanges, micronuclei  and dominant-lethal events. This classification does not
            imply that some chromosomal effects are not mutational events.
    
      Tests for cell  transformation, which monitor the production of preneoplastic or neoplastic
    cells in  culture, are also of importance because they attempt to  simulate essential steps in
    'Based on the recommendations of a working group which met in 1983 (5)
                                             B-4
    

    -------
                                         PREAMBLE
         iar carcinogenesis. These assays are not grouped with those listed above since the
         nanisms by which chemicals induce cell transformation may not necessarily be the result
     of genetic change.
    
       The selection of specific tests and end-points for consideration remains flexible and should
     reflect the most advanced state of knowledge in this field.
    
       The data from short-term tests are summarized by the Working Group and the test results
     tabulated according to the end-points detected and the biological complexities  of the test
     systems. The format of the table used is shown below.  In these tables, a  '+' indicates that
     the compound was judged by the Working Group  to be  significantly positive in one or more
     assays for the specific end-point and level of biological complexity; '-' indicates that it was
     judged to be negative in one or more assays; and '?' indicates that there were contradictory
     results from different laboratories or in different biological systems, or  that the result was
     judged »o be equivocal. These judgements reflect the assessment by the Working Group of
     the  quality of the data (including such factors as the purity of the test compound, problems
     of metaoolic activation and appropriateness of the  test system) and the relative significance
     of the component tests.
                        Overall assessment of data from short-term tests
    Genetic activity
    DMA damage Mutation Chromosomal
    effects
    Prokaryotes
    Fungi/
    Green plants
    Insects
    Mammalian cells
    (in vitro)
    Mammals
    (in vivo)
    Humans
    (in vivo)
    Cell
    transformation
    
    
    
      An  overall  assessment of the evidence for genetic activity is then made on the basis of
    the entries in the table, and the evidence is judged to fall into one of four categories, defined
    as follows:
    
         (i) Sufficient evidence is provided by at least three positive entries, one of which must
            involve mammalian cells in vitro or in vivo and which must include at least two of
            three end-points - DNA damage, mutation and chromosomal effects.
                                              B-5
    

    -------
                              IARC MONOGRAPHS VOLUME 34
    
    
          (ii) Limited evidence is provided by at least two positive entries.
    
          (HI) Inadequate evidence is available when there is only one positive entry or when there
            are too few data to permit an evaluation of an  absence of genetic activity  or when
            there are unexplained, inconsistent findings in different test systems.
    
          (iv) Wo evidence applies when there are only negative entries; these must include entries
            for at least two end-points and two levels of biological complexity, one of which must
            involve mammalian cells in vitro or in vivo.
      It is emphasized  that the above definitions are operational, and that the assignment of a
    chemical or complex mixture into one of these categories is thus arbitrary.
    
      In general, emphasis is  placed on positive results; however, in view of the limitations of
    current knowledge about mechanisms of carcinogenesis, certain cautions should be respected;
    (i) At present, short-term tests should not be used by themselves to  conclude whether or not
    an agent is carcinogenic, nor can they predict reliably the relative potencies of compounds as
    carcinogens in intact animals, (ii) Since the currently available tests do  not detect all classes
    of agents that are active in the carcinogenic  process (e.g., hormones), one must  be cautious
    in utilizing these tests as the  sole criterion for setting priorities in carcinogenesis research and
    in selecting compounds for animal bioassays.  (iii) Negative results from short-term tests cannot
    be considered as evidence to rule out carcinogenicity, nor does lack of  demonstrable genetic
    activity attribute an  epigenetic or any other property to a substance (5).
    (b) Evaluation of Carcinogenicity in Humans
    
      Evidence of carcinogenicity can be derived from case reports,  descriptive epidemiological
    studies and analytical epidemiological studies.
    
      An analytical study that shows a positive association between  an exposure and a cancer
    may be interpreted as implying causality to a greater or lesser extent, on the basis of  the
    following criteria: (a) There is  no identifiable  positive bias. (By 'positive bias'  is  meant  the
    operation  of factors in study design or execution that  lead erroneously to a more strongly
    positive association between an exposure and disease than  in fact exists. Examples of positive
    bias include, in case-control studies,  better documentation of the exposure for cases than for
    controls, and, in cohort studies, the use  of  better means of detecting cancer in  exposed
    individuals than in individuals not exposed.) (b)  The possibility of positive confounding has been
    considered. (By  'positive confounding' is meant a  situation in which the relationship between
    an exposure and a disease is rendered more strongly positive than it truly is as a result of an
    association between that exposure and another exposure which either causes or prevents the
    disease. An example of positive confounding is the association between coffee consumption
    and  lung cancer, which results from their joint association with  cigarette smoking.) (c) The
    association is unlikely to be due to chance alone, (d) The association is strong, (e) There  is a
    dose-response relationship.
    
      In  some  instances,  a  single epidemiological  study may  be strongly  indicative  of a
    cause-effect relationship;  however,  the most  convincing evidence of causality  comes when
    several independent studies done under different circumstances  result in 'positive' findings.
                                            B-6
    

    -------
                                         PREAMBLE
    
    
      Analytical epidemiologies! studies that show no association between an exposure and a
    cancer ('negative' studies) should be interpreted according to criteria analogous to those listed
    above: (a) there is no identifiable negative bias; (b) the possibility of negative confounding has
    been considered; and (c) the possible effects of misclassification of exposure or outcome have
    been weighed. In addition, it must be recognized that the probability that a given study can
    detect  a certain effect is  limited by its size. This can be perceived from the confidence limits
    around the estimate of association or relative risk. In a study regarded as 'negative', the upper
    confidence limit may indicate a relative risk substantially greater than unity; in that case, the
    study excludes only  relative risks that are  above the upper limit. This usually  means that a
    'negative'  study must be  large  to be convincing. Confidence in a 'negative' result is increased
    when several independent studies carried out  under different circumstances are in agreement.
    Finally, a 'negative' study may be considered to be relevant only to dose levels within or below
    the range of those observed in the study and is pertinent only if sufficient time has elapsed
    since first human exposure to the agent. Experience with human cancers of known etiology
    suggests  that the period from first exposure to a chemical carcinogen to development of
    clinically observed cancer is usually measured in decades and may be in excess of 30 years.
    
      The evidence for carcinogenicity from studies in humans is assessed by the Working Group
    and judged to fall into one of four groups, defined as follows:
    
         1. Sufficient evidence of carcinogenicity indicates that there is  a causal relationship
            between the exposure and human cancer.
    
         2. Limited evidence of carcinogenicity indicates that a causal interpretation  is  credible,
            but that  alternative explanations, such as chance, bias or  confounding, could not
            adequately be excluded.
    
         3. Inadequate evidence, which applies to both positive and negative evidence,  indicates
            that one of two conditions prevailed: (a) there are few pertinent data; or  (b) the
            available studies, while showing evidence of association, do not exclude chance, bias
            or confounding.
    
         4. No evidence applies when several adequate studies are available which do not show
            evidence of carcinogenicity.
    (c) Relevance of Experimental Data to the Evaluation of Carcinogenic Risk to Humana
    
      Information compiled from the first*29 volumes of the IARC Monographs (4,21,22) shows
    that, of the chemicals or groups of chemicals now generally accepted to cause or probably to
    cause cancer in humans, all (with the possible exception of arsenic) of those that have  been
    tested  appropriately produce cancer  in at  least  one  animal species.  For several  of the
    chemicals (e.g., aflatoxins, 4-aminobiphenyl,  diethylstilboestrol, melphalan, mustard gas and
    vinyl chloride), evidence of carcinogenicity in experimental animals preceded evidence obtained
    from epidemiological studies or case reports.
    
      For many of the chemicals (or complex mixtures) evaluated in the IARC Monographs for
    which there is sufficient evidence of carcinogenicity in animals, data relating to carcinogenicity
    for humans are either insufficient or  nonexistent.  In  the absence  of  adequate data on
    humans, it is reasonable, for practical purposes, to  regard chemicals for which there is
    sufficient evidence of carcinogenicity in animals as if they presented  a carcinogenic risk
    to humans. The use of the expressions 'for practical purposes' and  'as if they presented  a
                                               B-7
    

    -------
                             IARC MONOGRAPHS VOLUME 34
    
    
    carcinogenic risk' indicates that, at the present time, a correlation between carcinogenicity m
    animals and  possible human risk  cannot be  made  on a purely scientific basis, but only
    pragmatically. Such a pragmatical correlation may be  useful to regulatory agencies in making
    decisions related to the primary prevention of cancer.
    
      In the present state of knowledge, it would be difficult to define a predictable relationship
    between the dose (mg/kg bw per day) of a particular  chemical required to produce cancer in
    test animals and the dose that would produce a similar incidence of cancer in humans. Some
    data, however, suggest that such a relationship may exist (23,24), at least for certain classes
    of carcinogenic chemicals, although no acceptable method is currently available for quantifying
    the possible errors that may be involved in such an extrapolation procedure.
                                            B-8
    

    -------
            APPENDIX C
    
    
    
    CANCER INFORMATION SOURCES
    

    -------
                                     APPENDIX C
                             CANCER INFORMATION SOURCES
    
    IRIS
    
         The Integrated Risk Information System (IRIS)  is being designed and
    implemented by the EPA Office of Research and Development.   IRIS is a
    computer-based information system that provides an  introduction to the EPA's
    risk assessment and risk management information for specific chemical
    substances.  Each chemical file may contain one or  more of the following:
    
              Oral and/or inhalation reference doses;
              Qualitative and quantitative risk assessments for carcinogens
              (e.g., weight-of-evidence classification  and unit cancer risk
              factors);
              Drinking water health advisories;
              Risk management information (e.g., NESHAPs, reportable quantities,
              water quality criteria standards);
              Supplementary data (e.g., physical and chemical properties); and
              Synonyms for the chemical name.
    
         The reference doses for noncarcinogens and risk assessments for
    carcinogens are reviewed, evaluated, and verified by intra-Agency work
    groups of scientists.
         IRIS will be publicly available by the end of 1987.  It will be
    accessible through the EPA's electronic mail system as well as through hard
    copy reports.  For more information on IRIS, contact Rick Picardi,  IRIS
    Coordinator,  (202) 382-7315, (FTS) 382-7315.
    
    Toxic Air Pollutants
    
         The Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards within EPA evaluates
    emissions of potentially toxic air pollutants from stationary sources.
    Exposure and risk analyses reviewing potential carcinogenic and
    
                                         C-l
    

    -------
    noncarcinogenic risks associated with these emissions are prepared by the
    Pollutant Assessment Branch (PAB).  For current information on pollutants
    being evaluated by PAB or information on conducting an exposure and risk
    analysis for a toxic air pollutant, contact the Clearinghouse staff at
    (919) 541-0850, (FTS) 629-0850.
    
    Carcinogenic Risk Assessments
    
         The Carcinogen Assessment Group (CAG) within EPA's Office of Research
    and Development prepares qualitative and quantitative carcinogenic risk
    assessments.  As this information is peer-reviewed within the Agency, it
    will be incorporated into IRIS.  For more information on various activities,
    contact CAG at (202) 382-5898, (FTS) 382-5898.
                                         r-2
    

    -------